JP2022033404A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing an electromagnetic influence, such as noise, from being given or received easily, preventing a player from getting tired easily and reducing the player's burden, and securing a fair game without affecting the fair game in elements for composing a circuit.SOLUTION: When operation torque required for rotating a handle from an ignition position (required for an initial motion) is set to first operation torque (6.8 N mm), operation torque required for rotating a handle from an initial position to a leftward shooting reference position (win-rich position) is set to second operation torque (13.6 N mm), and operation torque required for rotating a handle from an initial position to the maximum rotational position (rightward shooting reference position, full-stroke position) is set to third operation torque (23.8 N mm), the second operation torque is larger than the first operation torque, the third operation torque is larger than the second operation torque, and the third operation torque is not more than two times larger than the second operation torque.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 71

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine capable of reducing the amount of noise-resistant electronic components used and reducing costs by increasing the noise resistance of the gaming control board itself.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 8-052257

There is a demand for elements constituting the circuit that are less likely to be or are not easily affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise. Further, there is a demand for a gaming machine that does not make the player tired easily and can reduce the burden on the player. Further, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can guarantee fair gaming without affecting fair gaming.

Therefore, according to the present invention, in the elements constituting the circuit, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player and reduce the burden on the player while making it difficult or difficult to receive electromagnetic influences such as noise, and the game is fair. The challenge is to provide a gaming machine that can guarantee fair gaming without affecting it.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Further, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solutions can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can also be made into a higher conceptual by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution A1: The gaming machine of the present solution includes a substrate on which a plurality of circuit elements including at least a control element and a wiring pattern including at least a signal line electrically connecting the circuit elements are mounted. The signal line includes at least a first signal line through which the first signal passes and a second signal line through which the second signal passes unlike the first signal line, and the second signal line. The signal is different from the first signal in at least one of importance, frequency, or update frequency, and the wiring pattern is arranged in at least a portion around the second signal line. It is a game machine equipped with a ground pattern.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) A substrate is provided on which a plurality of circuit elements including at least a control element and a wiring pattern including at least a signal line electrically connecting the circuit elements are mounted. The control element is a control IC, an output side IC, a reception side IC, a control CPU, or the like. Circuit elements are ICs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, circuits, resistors, capacitors and the like. The wiring pattern is a member including at least a signal line for electrically connecting each circuit element of a plurality of circuit elements.
(2) The signal line of (1) above includes at least a first signal line through which the first signal passes and a second signal line through which the second signal passes unlike the first signal line. include.
(3) The second signal of the above (2) is different from the first signal of the above (2) in at least one of the importance, the frequency, or the update frequency. The second signal is, for example, a specific signal that satisfies at least one of a condition relating to the importance of the signal, a condition relating to the frequency of the signal, and a condition relating to the update frequency (communication frequency) of the signal. The first signal is, for example, a non-specific signal that does not satisfy any of the above conditions.
The specific signal satisfying the condition regarding the importance of the signal is a signal having high importance in the control of the gaming machine (for example, a command data signal, a reset signal). The specific signal that satisfies the condition regarding the frequency of the signal is a high-speed signal (for example, a clock signal). The specific signal satisfying the condition regarding the update frequency of the signal is a signal having a high update frequency (for example, a command data signal).
(4) The wiring pattern of (1) above includes a ground pattern arranged at least a part around the second signal line. The ground may be expressed as ground or GND. The ground includes a solid land, a ground line, a solid wiring pattern, and the like.

According to the present solution, since the ground pattern is arranged at least a part around the second signal line, it is possible to make it difficult for the influence of the noise generated by the second signal line to be given to the other signal lines. Instead, the second signal line can be less susceptible to the influence of noise generated by other signal lines, and as a result, the elements constituting the circuit are less likely to be affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise. The machine can be provided.

Solution A2: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the game machine of the present solution has at least a part of the ground pattern and the second signal line arranged side by side in parallel on the substrate. The width in the lateral direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the ground pattern is equal to the width in the lateral direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the second signal line or short perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the second signal line. It is a gaming machine characterized by being wider than the width in the hand direction.

In the present solution, at least a part of the ground pattern and the second signal line are arranged side by side in parallel (for example, adjacent to each other and in the vicinity) on the substrate, and the width of the ground pattern (in the lateral direction). The width) is equal to or wider than the width of the second signal line (width in the lateral direction).

According to the present solution, since at least a part of the ground pattern and the second signal line are arranged side by side in parallel on the substrate, they are easily affected by noise, but the width of the ground pattern is wide. Is equal to or wider than the width of the second signal line, so that the width of the ground pattern is even more noisy than when the width of the ground pattern is narrower than the width of the second signal line. The impact can be suppressed.

Other Solution: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution has the second signal line as a signal line for a clock signal, a command data signal, or a reset signal. It is a gaming machine characterized by.

In the present solution, the second signal line is a signal line for a clock signal, a command data signal, or a reset signal.
The second signal line is particularly important, and the clock signal, which has a high frequency and is a noise source, the command data signal, which is frequently updated, and the mixture of noise, etc., have a great influence on the entire system (the update frequency is low). ) This is the signal line through which the reset signal passes.

According to the present solution, it is possible to protect a signal line or the like having a high importance, so that the quality of the gaming machine can be improved.

SOLUTION: In the gaming machine of the present solution means, an output side element for outputting a predetermined signal, a receiving side element for receiving the predetermined signal, and the output side element and the receiving side element are provided on a substrate. A transmission line that is electrically connected and transmits the predetermined signal is arranged, and a circuit element that reduces noise generated from the transmission line is arranged in the transmission line, from the output side element to the circuit element. The distance is shorter than the distance from the receiving side element to the circuit element.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) An output-side element that outputs a predetermined signal, a receiving-side element that receives a predetermined signal, and an output-side element and a receiving-side element are electrically connected to the substrate to transmit a predetermined signal. A transmission line is arranged. The substrate may be one substrate or a plurality of substrates. The board is, for example, a main control board, an effect control board, a driver control board, or the like. The output side element is a control IC, a control CPU, or the like. The receiving element is a control IC, a control CPU, or the like. The output side element and the reception side element may be arranged on the same substrate or may be arranged on different substrates. The transmission line is, for example, wiring, a pattern for transmitting a power signal, or the like, and may be arranged on a substrate, or may be a harness or the like connecting the substrate to the substrate.
(2) A circuit element for reducing noise generated from the transmission line of the above (1) is arranged on the transmission line of the above (1). Circuit elements are damping resistors, noise filters, ferrite beads and the like.

(3) Then, the distance (L1) from the output side element of the above (1) to the circuit element of the above (2) is the distance (L2) from the receiving side element of the above (1) to the circuit element of the above (2). ) Is shorter (L1 <L2).

According to this solution, since the circuit element is arranged on the transmission line, the electromagnetic influence on other wiring and other circuits can be suppressed as much as possible, and the malfunction of the entire circuit of the gaming machine can be prevented. Stable operation can be ensured, and as a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to be or is not easily affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise in the elements constituting the circuit.

Further, according to the present solution, the distance (L1) from the output side element to the circuit element is shorter than the distance (L2) from the receiving side element to the circuit element (L1 <L2), so that the effect of the circuit element is effective. It is possible to shorten the portion that is difficult to generate and lengthen the portion where the effect of the circuit element is likely to occur, and it is possible to efficiently suppress the influence of noise.

Solution F1-1: The gaming machine of this solution means a gaming board in which a gaming area having a first gaming area and a second gaming area is formed, and an operating means that can rotate within a range from an initial position to a maximum position. A board provided on the game board and on which a plurality of circuit elements including at least a control element and a wiring pattern including at least a signal line electrically connecting the circuit elements are mounted. The signal line includes at least a first signal line through which the first signal passes and a second signal line through which the second signal passes unlike the first signal line, and the second signal. Is different from the first signal in at least one of importance, frequency, or update frequency, and the wiring pattern is arranged in at least a portion around the second signal line. When the ground pattern is provided and the operating means is rotated to a predetermined reference position, the gaming medium is launched with respect to the first gaming area, and when the operating means is rotated to the maximum position, the second The operating torque required for launching the gaming medium to the gaming area and starting the rotation of the operating means from the initial position is set as the first operating torque, and the operating means is moved from the initial position to the predetermined reference position. Assuming that the operating torque required for rotation is the second operating torque and the operating torque required for rotating the operating means from the initial position to the maximum position is the third operating torque, the second operating torque is The gaming machine is characterized in that it is larger than the first operating torque, the third operating torque is larger than the second operating torque, and is not more than twice the second operating torque.

According to the present solution, since the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small, it is between a predetermined reference position (left-handed reference position) and a maximum position (right-handed reference position, maximum rotation position). The operating torque does not increase sharply, and the player feels that the difference between the second operating torque and the third operating torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
Further, according to the present solution, the elements constituting the circuit are less likely to be affected or affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise, and the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced, which is fair. It is possible to guarantee a fair game without affecting the game. In addition, the features of each of the above-mentioned solutions can be added to the present solution.

Solution F1-2: The gaming machine of this solution means a gaming board in which a gaming area having a first gaming area and a second gaming area is formed, and an operating means that can rotate within a range from an initial position to a maximum position. The output side element provided on the game board and outputting a predetermined signal, the receiving side element receiving the predetermined signal, and the output side element and the receiving side element are electrically connected to each other. A board on which a transmission line for transmitting a predetermined signal is mounted is provided, and a circuit element for reducing noise generated from the transmission line is arranged on the transmission line, from the output side element to the circuit element. The distance is shorter than the distance from the receiving side element to the circuit element, and when the operating means is rotated to a predetermined reference position, the game medium is launched with respect to the first gaming area, and the game medium is launched. When the operating means is rotated to the maximum position, the gaming medium is launched with respect to the second gaming area, and the first operation torque required to start the rotation of the operating means from the initial position is applied. The operation torque required to rotate the operating means from the initial position to the predetermined reference position is defined as the second operating torque, and the operation required to rotate the operating means from the initial position to the maximum position. Assuming that the torque is the third operating torque, the second operating torque is larger than the first operating torque, the third operating torque is larger than the second operating torque, and is twice or less than the second operating torque. It is a game machine characterized by being.

According to the present solution, since the difference between the second operation torque and the third operation torque is small, it is between a predetermined reference position (left-handed reference position) and a maximum position (right-handed reference position, maximum rotation position). The operating torque does not increase sharply, and the player feels that the difference between the second operating torque and the third operating torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
Further, according to the present solution, the elements constituting the circuit are less likely to be affected or affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise, and the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced, which is fair. It is possible to guarantee a fair game without affecting the game. In addition, the features of each of the above-mentioned solutions can be added to the present solution.

According to the present invention, the elements constituting the circuit are less likely to be affected or affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise, and the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced, resulting in a fair game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can guarantee fair gaming without affecting the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a front view which shows the part of a game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in an effect control device. It is a conceptual diagram explaining a ground pattern. It is a conceptual diagram explaining a ground pattern. It is a figure which shows the example which surrounds the whole circumference of a signal line with a ground pattern. It is a figure which shows the example which surrounds a part around a signal line with a ground pattern. This is an example of arranging a ground pattern for each of a plurality of signal lines. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the damping resistance. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the damping resistance. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the setting and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the evacuation process at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the special symbol game processing. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of a break. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable prize device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable prize device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation processing of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the procedure of closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in a fireworks rush or a coastal mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variation display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the big role middle production when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" (1/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the big role middle production when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" (2/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the big role middle production when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" (3/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the big role middle production when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol" or "8 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" (4/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a fireworks rush. It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role middle production executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and the like. It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role middle effect executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to a "10 round probability variation symbol". It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the coast mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the game board unit of another embodiment independently. FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 61. It is a figure which shows the outer rail. It is a figure which shows the game board, the outer rail and the rail base. It is a figure which shows the state which a game ball comes into contact with an outer rail. It is a figure which shows the outer rail and the game board. It is a figure which shows the periphery of the handle which the operation angle is 0 degree (the minimum angle). It is a figure which shows the periphery of the handle which the operation angle is 100 degrees (maximum angle). It is a figure which shows the relationship between the torque of a handle, and the movable position of a handle (Example 1). It is a figure which shows the relationship between the torque of a handle, and the movable position of a handle (Example 2).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

Here, in the present specification, the left side is the left side when viewed from the player who is seated facing the pachinko machine 1, the right side is the right side when viewed from the player, and the upper side is the top side when viewed from the player. The explanation is that the lower side is the bottom when viewed from the person, the front side is the front side when viewed from the player, and the back side is the rear side when viewed from the player.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

Further, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game hall inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (a game area on which the game ball flows down, a board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

[Composition of ball plate]
The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 toward the front surface as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower plate 6b or lower plate) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It will be paid out in 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) worth of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the example of the model connected to the card unit is described, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can, for example, push the upper plate ball removal button 6d to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can push the lower plate ball removing lever 6e backward to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration in the game area 8a will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower side of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper position of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49 each incorporate a speaker 54 on a glass frame, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each have a speaker 55 in a glass frame. Is built in. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled toward the front side by the player, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (notice effect, probable change promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

Further, around the push button 64, a ring-shaped portion 65 is installed so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. Further, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is expressed as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time was exhausted. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on / off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced version image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced version image. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit 65 in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is configured to have a structure that greatly protrudes upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it pops out to a height about three times higher than in the normal state. The push button 64 has a light source inside thereof. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but when protruding, it emits more colorfully and can exert a great presence. By such an operation of the push button 64, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60, but the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Decorative unit]
A decorative unit 400 is attached to the upper front part of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative unit 400 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined mounting member (mechanical mechanism such as a screw or a hook). The decorative unit 400 may be non-removable from the pachinko machine 1.
The decorative unit 400 (decorative object) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light.

The decorative unit 400 includes a main body unit 410 arranged at the upper part and a front lamp unit 420 arranged at the lower part of the main body unit 410.

The main body unit 410 is a cube-shaped member on which predetermined character information is displayed, and emits light when an LED (glass frame top lamp 46) arranged in the rear integrated door unit 4 emits light.

Further, the front lamp unit 420 is a member in which a hemispherical member is coupled to a cylindrical member, and the LED (board surface lamp 53) arranged in the rear gaming board unit 8 emits light to emit light.

The cylindrical member is preferably colorless and transparent in order to improve the visibility of the upper sphere passage 500, and the hemispherical member is preferably colored and transparent in order to improve the effect of effect.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the power supply control unit 162, the main control board unit 170, the payout device unit 172, the flow path unit 173, the launch control board set 174, the payout control board unit 176, and the back cover Unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), external terminal boards 160, power cord (power plug) 164, which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, are used. A ground wire (earth terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later with reference to another block diagram (FIGS. 5 and 6).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a manner visible in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for a setting key. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing a RAM (RWM) installed in the main controller, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referring to the setting related to the game of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , A game ball replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game ball stored in the prize ball tank 172a is guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal board 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island facility of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side portion of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right side portion of the game area 8a is the special game state (big hit game state). , Small hit game state, low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, etc.) is the second game area (right-handed area, specific area). The left side portion of the gaming area 8a is also used in the high probability non-time shortening state (advantageous gaming state). Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30. Further, the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and the one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged on the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. There is.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation in the process of its flow down. The ball enters the 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during open operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit a game ball into the area) (perform a so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ), It is necessary to hit the game ball (execute the so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and the right start is performed accordingly. It is possible to enter a ball into the winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue piece type (veloc type) opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position (retracted position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b catches the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It is possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device in which the opening / closing member is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge to open the right starting winning opening.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit or small hit). It operates when the condition that it is the 5th round or the 7th to 10th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generation means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a, so that the opening / closing member 30a is moved to the first prize opening 30b. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Then, when the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated.

The second variable winning device 31 is the same as the first variable winning device 30 when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit), and the predetermined second condition (for example, is). It operates when the condition that it is the 6th round of the big hit game) is satisfied, and enables the ball to enter the 2nd big winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, 2nd special entry). Ball event generation means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a, so that the opening / closing member 31a is moved to the second large winning opening 31b. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends downward from the second large winning opening 31b, turns left from there, extends downward to the left, and then extends downward again.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a blade member 31d for the probability change region and a hole 31e for the probability change region are arranged in the middle flow of the guide passage 31c, and the guide passage 31c is arranged. A discharge port 31f (discharge area) is arranged downstream of the above.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first entered by the second count switch 85. Here, when the probability-changing region solenoid that operates the probability-changing region blade member 31d is ON, the probability-changing region blade member 31d rises and guides the game ball to the probability-changing region hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 31d is turned off, the probabilistic region blade member 31d does not rise, so that the game ball passes through the upper part of the probabilistic region blade member 31d. It is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability change area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation region is an region in which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. If so, it is an area where the game ball can pass.

The probabilistic region blade member 31d may operate during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region is such that the probabilistic region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probabilistic region is opened for a long period of time. One of a long opening pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds) and a short opening pattern that opens a short opening for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round is applied. .. Which operation pattern is used to operate the probabilistic region blade member 31d can be selected by the winning symbol. Specifically, a long open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a long time is selected when the probabilistic symbol is won, and a short open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a short time is selected when the normal symbol is won.

As the operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 31d, only the pattern in which the probabilistic region blade member 31d is long-opened is applied, and when the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened and the round ends, the probabilistic region The opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time may be eliminated. Further, since the game ball does not reach the probability change region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult to guide the game ball to the probability change region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (high probability time reduction state). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (low probability time reduction state).

The effect unit 40 is installed in the game board unit 8 from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a decoration imitating a butterfly) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game balls that have entered the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are also driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls that have been removed are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

A rear lamp unit 430 is arranged on the upper part of the game board unit 8. After that, the rear lamp unit 430 is arranged at a position overlapping with the front lamp unit 420.
An LED (not shown) as a board lamp is arranged in the rear lamp unit 430, and when this LED is turned on, the front lamp unit 420 emits light.

FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). The game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, and the like. A game status display device 38 is provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamp to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, 0 storage numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, one storage number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is blinked and another lamp is lit, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. Display the individual, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, a normal symbol working memory lamp 33a may be configured by using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, it is memorized that the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. Suddenly (up to 4), each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage as a trigger, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol has not yet started to change at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (Design display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a each have 0 to 4 lamps (LEDs), for example, 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of a combination of turning off, lighting, and blinking of the two lamps (LEDs). Displays the number of stored memory (means for displaying the number of stored memory). For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, 0 storage numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, one storage number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two storage numbers are displayed and one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, three storage numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinking together, the storage number is displayed. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after being increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26. It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the ball entering, the display mode is changed by 1 each. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. (Up to 4 pieces), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the display state is changed by 1 piece. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed), and the middle start winning opening 26 The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the ball. Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the game ball is inserted into the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation storage lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not started yet at that time. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f, respectively. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation storage lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

These LED lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are divided into four different control areas (hereinafter, referred to as “common”) for the purpose of controlling the switching between lighting and extinguishing. From a different point of view, the integrated display board 89 has four commons, and each lamp belongs to one of the commons. In this embodiment, a dynamic lighting method is adopted, and the lamps are driven in order in common units at intervals of interrupt cycles (for example, 4 ms). Therefore, not all the lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are driven at the same time.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI that integrates semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number circuit 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I / O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. Of these, the random number circuit 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is. It is input to the main control CPU 72. Further, the interrupt controller 192 receives each interrupt request (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I / O port 79, the timer circuit 194, and the serial communication circuit 196, and receives these interrupt requests. Control based on priority. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as a clock generation circuit (not shown), a reset controller that monitors various states and generates a reset as needed, and these are circuit boards together with the main control CPU 72. Implemented above. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion). The I / O port of the main control device 70 may be of a serial type.

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting change device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting change device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least a setting value of a plurality of stages regarding the winning probability of the special symbol lottery) (setting changing means), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the procedure can be performed as follows.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyhole 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 for setting. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, the safety lock is locked by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be changed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 with the setting key rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 200.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the target setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be taken out from the setting key hole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed and the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 200, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Setting change status]
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the state shifts to the setting changing state (setting change state, setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared. do.

In the state where the setting is being changed, the display is not made on the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38), and the game ball cannot be launched or the game ball prize ball or the like cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor 200, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and a set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6. Then, when the "setting key is OFF", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (hidden) 1" display of the ratio segment.

In this state, if the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off. , Move to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 304 also serves as a setting change switch, but a setting change switch may be separately provided without using the RAM clear switch 304.

[Setting confirmation status]
On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode). ..

Similar to the state in which the setting is being changed, in the state in which the setting is being confirmed, the display is not made on the main display, and the game ball cannot be launched or the game ball prize ball or the like cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. The set value is displayed. In the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being confirmed ends, and the power is temporarily turned off. After shifting to the previous state, it shifts to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning opening device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number of balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the probability variation region switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means).

Similarly, the game board unit 8 has a first winning opening switch 86 that detects the entry of a game ball into the normal winning opening 22, and a second winning opening switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 24. It is equipped with 81. Regarding the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to play a game ball for each ordinary winning opening 22. The incoming ball may be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the probability change area switch 95 are used. The winning detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87, and the panel relay terminal plate 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and are integrated. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87 to the display board 89.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 indicates the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening), and the number of outs (out switch) indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. It is a monitor for displaying the base calculated by dividing by the number of game balls detected in. The base is calculated for each section preset using an area (outside area) different from the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are calculated. , It is displayed by switching at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the 7 segments.

The game board unit 8 is formed with a merging passage for merging game balls that have passed through all the winning openings and out openings, and an out switch can be provided in this merging passage. The out switch detects a game ball passing through the merging passage, and a detection signal is input to the main control device 70 each time the game ball is detected. The main control device 70 can count the number of out balls based on the detection signal input from the out switch. Since the game balls launched into the game area 8a always pass through the confluence passage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the out switch is the number of launch balls launched into the game area 8a, that is, the game area. The number of discharges (number of out balls) discharged from 8a can be counted.

Although the performance display monitor 200 is described with an example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, in the game board unit 8, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 corresponding to the upstream of the probabilistic region, and the first large winning opening, respectively. A solenoid 90, a second winning opening solenoid 97, and a solenoid 99 for a probability variation region are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively (excited). (Operate) or move the blade member 31d for the probability variation region. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed through the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, the contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and causes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls to be executed. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100. A payout detection switch can be arranged in the vicinity of the payout counting switch 106.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the game balls paid out more than that are described above. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a launch solenoid 110 is installed together with a launch control board 108 (ball launching means). Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent out to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in one minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted to the firing control board 108 via the firing relay terminal plate 118. Will be done. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal board 118 is connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120, and when the card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120, the launch control board is also connected. The drive circuit of 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 has a built-in frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted in the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with an effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub control board, effect control board, sub control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI having a built-in semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the effect such as VDP152, driver IC132, and audio IC134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as lamps 46 to 52, a board lamp 53, and a movable motor 57. Further, the voice IC 134 controls the driving of the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. The internal functional configuration of such an effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to the following figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness adopts a parallel format according to the bus width of various effects commands (hereinafter referred to as "effect commands") transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. Alternatively, the serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I / O).

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55. It is applied to 56 and 58. Further, a volume control switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136 in addition to the handle lever 62, the button motor 63, the push button 64, and the direction key 66, and when the player operates these operating members, they are connected. The contact signal of is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub-connection board 136. Here, an example in which the operation members 62, 64, 66 are connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given, but when the saucer illumination board is installed, each operation member 62, 64, 66 is attached to the saucer illumination board. It may be connected.

The button motor 63 is a stepping motor corresponding to the push button 64, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 60 (switching means). The operation unit control device drives the button motor 63 based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124, so that the push button 64 is in a normal state (initial position) or a protruding state (maximum movable position). Switch (displace) to.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the driver board 138 in addition to the board surface lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are external from the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is to be output to. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores a basic program for controlling the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , SRAM 182, a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the real-time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as input / output drivers and counter / timer circuits (not shown), and the like. While the driving power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124, the lithium battery 186 stores this power and charges itself. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the drive power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

Normally, for the control of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, various lamps 46 to 53, and the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 are controlled as described above. Includes control of the production using. The flow of this effect control can be broadly divided into two stages: "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device, respectively, control devices 134, 152, 198, 199. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) using each device in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Etc.) are realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized by properly using the resources of the effect control CPU 126. In FIG. 5, the internal resources of the effect control CPU 126 are divided into several functional blocks: the effect control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, and the input control unit 228. And so on. In the following description, it is assumed that each functional block is treated as the operation subject of the control process.

First, at the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operating unit. Further, in the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are the main operating units according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, in addition to the circuit board (effect display control board) and CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190 on which the VDP 152 is mounted, the effect control device 124 also includes an audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect. It is equipped with an LED driver 198, an SMC (serial control controller) 199, and a driver IC 132.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output with the progress of the effect in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated into one chip together with the effect control CPU 126. Further, the VDP 152 has a built-in VRAM 156 and a drawing material decoder 157. Of these, the VRAM 156 is mainly used when developing the drawing material, and the drawing material decoder 157 is used when decompressing (decoding) the drawn drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads out the necessary drawing material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is expanded in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the image data buffered here, reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the staging, and is integrated with the staging control CPU 126 and one chip like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is connected to an amplifier (not shown), an external DRAM, or a CG bus. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 for decompressing (decoding) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out the necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. By outputting the decoded sound to the speaker 54 on the glass frame, the speaker 55 in the glass frame, the inner frame speaker 56, and the outer frame speaker 58 via the amplifier, the sound reproduction of stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch (as a larger number of channels). May be good). Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56, 58 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the various lamps 46 to 53 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the luminance pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the driving data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the movable body motor 57 that is the drive source of the movable body 40f for the effect provided inside the effect unit 40. The SMC 199 is also integrated into the effect control CPU 126 and one chip. In SMC199, a clock-synchronized serial system is adopted. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the motor control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible that the SMC 199 is configured to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to the various lamps 46 to 53 and the movable motor 57. By managing the operation, it is possible to realize a directing reproduction using a lamp or a movable body. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a light source built in each part of the operation unit 60 and decoration / directing installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 and the like are included. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Further, although an example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, the saucer illumination board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer illumination board is attached to the glass frame decoration lamp 52. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via the driver IC 132.

In addition, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the operating member such as the handle lever 62 or the push button 64 is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.
The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1.

7 and 8 are conceptual diagrams illustrating the ground pattern. FIG. 7 shows an example when there is no ground pattern, and FIG. 8 shows an example when there is a ground pattern. Here, first, the ground pattern will be described. The ground pattern is a pattern for securing a place where the potential difference from the reference potential is 0V in an electric circuit or the like. The ground pattern includes a signal ground pattern connected to a common line pattern of each circuit and a frame ground pattern connected to a metallic housing or the like. The ground pattern may be formed on the board or as one wire (ground line) in the harness, but it is arranged so as to surround at least a part around a specific signal line. Will be done. By forming the ground pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of noise and the like in at least a part around a specific signal line.

[No ground pattern]
As shown in FIG. 7, the signal line 700 transmits a high-speed signal, and the signal line 710 transmits an important signal. Here, the ground pattern is not arranged around each signal line. In this case, there are the following problems.
(1) Since the waveform of the signal (voltage) fluctuates frequently (waveform W1) in the high-speed signal transmitted by the signal line 700, noise may be radiated to the outside (noise N1, N2).
(2) The high-speed signal transmitted by the signal line 700 may affect the signal of the adjacent signal line 710 (noise N2).
(3) An important signal transmitted by the signal line 710 may be affected by noise from the outside (noise N2). In this case, the important signal transmitted by the signal line 710 may have a distorted waveform (waveform W2). An important signal may be a signal whose waveform fluctuates less frequently than a high speed signal. Also, important signals may be signals that are transmitted only when needed, rather than signals that are always transmitted, such as high speed signals.

[With ground pattern]
As shown in FIG. 8, the signal line 700 transmits a high-speed signal, and the signal line 710 transmits an important signal. Further, a ground pattern 800 is arranged around the signal line 700 and the signal line 710. Specifically, each wiring pattern is arranged in the order of the ground pattern 800, the signal line 700, the ground pattern 800, the signal line 710, and the ground pattern 800.

By arranging such a ground pattern 800, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) It is possible to suppress the high-speed signal transmitted by the signal line 700 from radiating noise to the outside (noise N3, N4). The noise shown by the broken line in the figure indicates the noise suppressed or blocked by the ground pattern 800 (hereinafter, the same applies).
(2) It is possible to suppress the influence of the high-speed signal transmitted on the signal line 700 on the important signal transmitted on the adjacent signal line 710 (noise N4).
(3) An important signal transmitted by the signal line 710 can suppress the influence of noise received from the outside (adjacent signal line 700) (noise N4). As a result, the waveform of the important signal transmitted by the signal line 710 is not disturbed (waveform W21).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of circuit elements (IC, circuit, etc.) including at least a control element (IC, etc.) and a wiring pattern including at least a signal line for electrically connecting the circuit elements are mounted. It is equipped with a board (main control board, effect control board, driver board, etc.). The signal line is a non-specific signal line (first signal line) through which a non-specific signal (first signal) passes, and a specific signal (second signal) through which a specific signal line (second signal) passes unlike a non-specific signal line. At least includes a specific signal line (second signal line). A particular signal is different from a non-specific signal in at least one of importance, frequency, or update frequency. The wiring pattern comprises a ground pattern arranged at least in part around a particular signal line.

For example, a plurality of signal lines are connected to an output side IC (control element) (not shown), and a ground pattern 800 is arranged at least a part around a specific signal line among the plurality of signal lines. ing. The signal line 700 and the signal line 710 are specific signal lines. The specific signal line is preferably a signal line for a clock signal, a command data signal, or a reset signal (a signal line for a power failure warning signal).

The clock signal is a signal input from the clock generation circuit to the main control unit. The command data signal is a signal of an effect command input from the main control device to the effect control device. The reset signal is a signal input to the main controller from the IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage.

The specific signal line is preferably a signal line for a data bus, a signal line for a solenoid drive signal, or a signal line for chip select. The non-specific signal line (signal line in which the ground pattern is not arranged around, the first signal line), which is not a specific signal line, is, for example, a signal for a gate switch, a count switch, a winning opening switch, and a probability variation area switch. Lines and the like can be mentioned.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example in which the entire circumference of the signal line is surrounded by a ground pattern. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, each member may be shown differently from the actual size and dimensions (hereinafter, the same applies).
The output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 are connected by a signal line 700. Here, only one signal line is shown, but in reality, a plurality of signal lines may exist (hereinafter, the same applies). The ground pattern 800 is arranged around the output side IC 900, the receiving side IC 910, and the signal line 700 so as to surround the entire circumference of the signal line 700. Since the ground pattern 800 surrounds the entire circumference of the signal line 700, noise generated from the signal line 700 and noise received by the signal line 700 can be greatly reduced.

At least a part of the ground pattern 800 and the signal line 700 (specific signal line, second signal line) are arranged side by side in parallel on the substrate (main control board, effect control board, driver board, etc.). .. The width X in the lateral direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the ground pattern 800 is equal to the width Y in the lateral direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the signal line 700 (specific signal line) or orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the signal line 700. It is preferably wider than the width Y in the lateral direction (X ≧ Y). A via hole 810 can be formed in the ground pattern 800. The via hole 810 is arranged on the front surface side (front surface side) and the rear surface side (back surface side) when the substrate on which the ground pattern 800 is arranged is, for example, a double-sided substrate (two-layer substrate). It is a hole for electrically connecting to the ground pattern. It is preferable to form the via hole 810 in the middle of the ground pattern 800, and it is preferable to form one via hole 810 for each predetermined length (for example, about 15 mm or less). Further, it is preferable that the width X of the ground pattern 800 is equal to the diameter D of the via hole 810 or larger than the diameter D of the via hole 810.

At least one via hole 810 can be formed when the pattern width of the ground pattern 800 is a predetermined value (0.5 mm) or more. By arranging a plurality of via holes 810 in the middle of the ground pattern 800, the ground pattern 800 becomes an antenna (radio wave source, reception source, etc.) and affects other signal lines or is affected by other signal glands. It is possible to suppress receiving (antenna prevention).

When forming a via hole (through hole, machined hole), it is preferable to secure a dimension equal to or larger than the plate thickness from the via hole to the end face of the substrate. The pattern width and pattern spacing arranged on the control board (printed wiring board) on which the output side IC 900 and the receiving side IC 910 are arranged are a minimum of 0.2 mm, preferably 0.2 mm, regardless of whether the board is a two-layer board or a four-layer board. , 0.3 mm or more is preferable. The layer structure of the four-layer board can be (1) component surface, (2) GND layer, (3) power supply layer (GND), and (4) solder surface in this order. In the power supply layer (GND) of the above (3), the power supply pattern width can be secured as much as necessary, and the others can be solid GND.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which a part around a signal line is surrounded by a ground pattern.
The output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 are connected by a signal line 700. Further, the output side IC 901 and the reception side IC 911 are connected by a signal line 710. The ground pattern 800 is arranged between the signal lines 700 and the signal lines 710 extending in parallel. As described above, the ground pattern 800 is arranged so as to surround at least a part of the periphery of the signal line 700 and the signal line 710, not the entire periphery. Further, via holes 810 are arranged at both ends of the ground pattern 800.

By arranging such a ground pattern 800, it is possible to prevent the high-speed signal transmitted by the signal line 700 and the important signal transmitted by the signal line 710 from affecting each other. Further, by arranging the via hole 810 at the end of the ground pattern 800, it is possible to prevent the ground pattern 800 from acting as an antenna and affecting other signal lines or being affected by other signal glands (antenna). Prevention).

FIG. 11 is an example in which a ground pattern is arranged for each of a plurality of signal lines.
Here, three ground patterns 800 are arranged. Four signal lines 720A are arranged between the first and second ground patterns 800, and four signal lines 720B are also arranged between the second and third ground patterns 800. There is. The signal lines to be combined can be, for example, a bus line of a memory, and a ground pattern can be arranged every several lines (several bits). By arranging such a ground pattern 800, it is possible to combine a plurality of signal lines into one and suppress the generation of noise.

12 and 13 are conceptual diagrams illustrating damping resistance.
FIG. 12 shows an example when there is no damping resistance, and FIG. 13 shows an example when there is a damping resistance.
[No damping resistance]
As shown in FIG. 12, the output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 are connected by a signal line 700. In this case, the high-speed signal transmitted by the signal line 700 may cause overshoot (undershoot) and cause radiation noise (noise N5). Overshoot (undershoot) is a phenomenon in which the waveform exceeds the reference line at which the waveform becomes a steady value at the rising edge (falling edge) of the square wave.

In the high-speed signal transmitted by the signal line 700, the waveform of the signal (voltage) fluctuates frequently, and a plurality of signals by a plurality of signal lines may be transmitted at the same timing, so that each signal is transmitted. Interfering (combined), a part of the waveform tends to be sharply pointed (waveform W3).

[With damping resistance]
As shown in FIG. 13, the output side IC 900 and the receiving side IC 910 are connected by a signal line 700. The output side IC 900 is an output side element that outputs a high-speed signal (predetermined signal). The receiving side IC 910 is a receiving side element that receives a high-speed signal. The signal line 700 is a transmission line that connects the output side IC 900 and the reception side IC 910 and transmits a high-speed signal.

A damping resistor 920 is arranged on the signal line 700. The damping resistor 920 is a circuit element arranged in the signal line 700 (connected in series) to reduce noise generated from the signal line 700. The damping resistance 920 is a resistance for attenuating the sharpness of the waveform (smoothing the waveform, making the waveform gentle), and can reduce signal noise and suppress overshoot and undershoot.

Further, on both sides of the signal line 700 (upper side and lower side in the drawing), ground patterns 800 are arranged from the output side IC 900 to the receiving side IC 910. The ground pattern 800 may be arranged so as to surround the output side IC 900 and the receiving side IC 910, or may be arranged only between the output side IC 900 and the damping resistance 920.

For example, the output side IC 900 corresponds to the effect control device 124 and the effect control CPU 126 shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, and the receiving side IC 910 corresponds to the driver board 138, the LED driver 198, SMC 199, and the driver IC 132 shown in FIGS. 5 and 6. Etc. are applicable.

That is, the output side IC 900 (output side element) is arranged on the effect control board of the effect control device 124 shown in FIGS. 5 and 6. Further, a receiving side IC 910 (receiving side element) is arranged on the driver board 138 shown in FIGS. 5 and 6. A signal line that electrically connects the effect control board and the driver board 138 to the board or harness that connects the effect control board and the driver board 138, and transmits predetermined signals such as drive signals, control signals, and command signals. 700 (transmission line) is arranged. A damping resistor 920 (circuit element) for reducing noise generated from the signal line 700 is arranged on the signal line 700.

The distance L1 from the output side IC 900 to the damping resistance 920 is shorter than the distance L2 from the receiving side IC 910 to the damping resistance 920. Since the effect of the damping resistance 920 is exerted in the portion downstream of the damping resistance 920 (the portion of L2), the damping resistance 920 is arranged as close as possible to the output side IC 900 (or its terminal). Is preferable.

By adopting such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) Overshoot (undershoot) can be suppressed by the damping resistance 920, and radiation noise can be suppressed (waveform W4).
(2) By moving the position where the damping resistor 920 is arranged closer to the output side IC900, it is possible to limit (reduce) the range in which radiation noise (noise N5) is generated.
(3) Radiation noise (noise N5) can be suppressed by arranging the ground patterns 800 on both sides of the signal line 700.

[Relationship between set value and winning probability of special symbol lottery]
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.

When the set value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/219".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/100".

As described above, the larger the set value, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery, which is advantageous for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described in the example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be set differently. Further, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time shortening state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special fluctuations, etc.).

Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in the main controller]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the CPU initialization process. The CPU initialization process restores the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, and conversely clears the backup information to restore the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for adjusting. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

15 and 16 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the CPU initialization process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S100: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priority order required to control the interrupt request generated during the execution of the CPU initialization process, and the main control CPU 72 sets the priority order defined in the interrupt vector table. Based on this, multiple interrupt requests will be executed in order. The control of the interrupt process will be described in detail later.

Step S104: The main control CPU 72 saves the RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the values of the input port to which the RAM clear signal is input are acquired twice in succession, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes the standby process here. This process is for securing a certain amount of standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) after turning on the power, and checking the power cutoff warning signal (signal indicating that the power is being cut off) during that time. It is a thing. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the power cutoff warning signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power cutoff warning signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. Then, if the input of the power cutoff warning signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. This makes it possible to protect the system when, for example, the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been operated (switch ON). do. If the RAM clear switch 304 is not operated (No), then step S112 is executed.

Step S112: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed by the process executed at the time of the previous power cutoff and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A5H") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S114. The process executed when the power is cut off will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S114: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the thumb check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S116.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents of a part of the RAM 76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a continuous work area within a predetermined range based on the address of the backup validity determination flag to be cleared when the power is restored. By clearing the stored contents of this area for each address (in bytes) and retaining the saved valid backup information as it is, the main control CPU 72 can restore the state when the power is cut off. (Memory restoration means).

Step S118: The main control CPU 72 should transmit to the power return designated effect command (command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124) and the payout command (to the payout control device 92) indicating that the main control CPU 72 has recovered from the power cutoff and started. Command) is set.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 304 is operated when the power is turned on (step S110: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S112: No), or the backup information is not normal. In the case (step S114: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S120.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S122: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S124: The main control CPU sets a RAM clear designated effect command (command for the effect control device 124) and a payout command (command for the payout control device 92) indicating that the RAM clear has been started.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear specification) set in step S124 to the effect command buffer. The main control CPU 72 further includes various other effect commands (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state specification command, a special symbol destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, and an operation memory number decrease) required for the effect control. Set the time effect command, count cut counter remaining number command, special game state specification command, launch position specification command, etc.) and output these to the effect command buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 sets different values for these effect commands when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. By transmitting these effect commands to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent effect command transmission process (step S142), the effect control device 124 is in the effect state (for example, internal) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. It is possible to restore the probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the sound output content, the light emission state of various lamps, etc.).

Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the contents of each input port and stores the result of performing a predetermined operation on the value in the state flag of each input port. When this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S131 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal to the specific bit of the output port. The main command permission signal is a signal indicating to the payout control device 92 that the main control device 70 permits the transmission of a command to itself. When the main command permission signal is input to the payout control device 92, the payout control device 92 shall input a payout command permission signal indicating that the main control device 70 is permitted to transmit the payout command. It becomes.

Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (OFF) the specific bit of the output port to clear the emission permission signal (specific output information clearing means). The launch permission signal is included in the backup target when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power of the main control device 70 (pachinko machine 1) is restored, the main control CPU 72 executes the flow at the time of power restoration in the CPU initialization process, and the state when the power of the main control device 70 is cut off based on the backup information. (Step S116), but as part of that, the launch permission signal is also returned to the state when the power was cut off.

The emission permission signal is set to a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (for example, the buffer for the output port 3) stored in the RAM 76. However, the address of the output port buffer targeted here is located in the address space of the RAM 76, which is out of the continuous area targeted for clearing in step S116. Therefore, if, as part of the process of step S116, an attempt is made to clear the value of the specific bit of the specific address in which the emission permission signal is set in addition to the area to be cleared, the specific address is specified. , It is necessary to perform an exceptional process of clearing only the data of a specific bit out of the 8-bit data stored at that address and maintaining the data of the remaining 7 bits, which is a part of the RAM 76. The efficiency of the process of clearing the area becomes very poor. Due to such circumstances, the main control CPU 72 handles the launch permission signal in the same manner as other backup target data without clearing the launch permission signal in the previous step S116, and temporarily returns to the state when the power is cut off.

However, at the stage where the backup information is returned in the main control device 70 (step S116), communication with the payout control device 92 has not yet been established, and is the payout control device 92 started normally (main control device)? It has not been confirmed whether or not the instruction by the command from 70 can be accepted. When the power is cut off while the launch permission signal is ON, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, and as a result, the game ball can be launched even though the normality of the payout control device 92 is unknown. A condition will occur. Here, tentatively, the payout control device 92 is replaced with a modified product (for example, one in which the number of prize balls is modified) that does not conform to the original inspection while the power supply is cut off, and the main control device 70 is subsequently restored to the power supply. When activated, the game ball can be launched because the launch permission signal is returned to ON. Such a state is not preferable from the viewpoint of security.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the firing permission signal is explicitly cleared once before the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop, regardless of whether the startup is performed by power recovery or the RAM clear designation (starting). (Reset to OFF). After that, the main control CPU 72 confirms that the payout command permission signal has been input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and then sends the payout command to the payout control device 92. The control that sets the launch permission signal to ON is adopted. By performing such control, even if the game is started (restarted) by the processing of the main loop, the launch of the game ball is not permitted unless the communication between the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92 is established. , It is possible to avoid the illegal launch of the game ball when the above-mentioned fraud is committed.

Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets the timer interrupt cycle. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.
Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop, which will be described later, as a preliminary preparation for the interrupt process. By performing this process, it is possible to normally start the interrupt process that occurs thereafter, and to continue the process from the main loop after the interrupt process is executed.

When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 described below). As long as the power supply from the power control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop from beginning to end.

Step S136, Step S138: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) excluding jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and hit determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols). Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S212 in FIG. 19), but the initial values of the loop counter (all) each time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S138, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S138 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S136 is that the same process is executed in another timer interrupt process (step S210 in FIG. 19), so that it overlaps with this (conflict). ) To prevent. In the present embodiment, the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster (for example, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number. The timer interrupt process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S140: The main control CPU 72 executes the received command management process. In this process, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and the process is performed according to the result. If the received command is a payout start specification command, the main control CPU 72 outputs a payout start confirmation specification command to the payout command buffer. If not, is the received data within a predetermined range (receive command)? If it is out of the range, the payout error specification command is output to the production command buffer, and the payout radio error flag is set according to the situation.

Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect command transmission process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 transmits each effect command output to the effect command buffer to the effect control device 124.

Step S144, Step S146: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when an interrupt request is generated during the execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes. The content of the interrupt process will be described later using yet another flowchart.

[Evacuation processing when power is turned off]
Next, a process to be executed when a power cutoff (hereinafter, abbreviated as "power cutoff") occurs will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the evacuation process when the power is turned off. In the main controller 70, the occurrence of power failure and the occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted on a reset controller (not shown)). This monitoring IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I / O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes a power cut-off save process (XINT interrupt process, backup means) triggered by an input of a power cutoff warning signal to the XINT terminal (XINT interrupt). Hereinafter, each procedure of the evacuation process when the power is turned off will be described later.

Steps S150 and S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power cutoff detection switch input port of the parallel I / O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not the power cutoff warning signal has been detected. If it cannot be confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 permits interruption, ends the power cutoff save process, and ends the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIGS. 15 to 16) (FIGS. 15 to 16). Returns to the program address specified by the stack pointer). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S154.

Step S154: The main control CPU 72 has an output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first prize opening solenoid 90, the second prize opening solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region, as well as a test signal terminal and command control. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the signal.

Step S156, Step S158: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S160: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S158: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the thumb check buffer.

Step S162: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area.
Step S164: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “00H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined value for counting the number of checks of the power cutoff warning signal in the loop counter.
Step S168: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal has been detected. The method for confirming the power cutoff warning signal is the same as the method in step S150 described above. When it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the previous step S166 again. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S170.

Step S170: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter.
Step S172: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the loop counter is “0”. If it cannot be confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S168. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S174.
Step S174: The main control CPU 72 shifts from the power-off save process to the CPU initialization process (FIG. 15). At this time, since the RETI instruction is not executed before the transition to the CPU initialization process, the CPU initialization process can be started with other interruptions prohibited.

The process of steps S166 to S172 described above is a so-called standby process (follow-up process) executed in preparation for disconnecting the power supply from the power supply control unit 162. If the power cutoff warning signal is continuously detected, the loop counter does not become "0" because steps S166 to S168 are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the standby state will be continued as long as the power supply is sustained. On the other hand, if the detection of the power cutoff warning signal is temporary (for example, detection due to a momentary power failure or the like), steps S168 to S172 are repeatedly executed, and the loop counter is subtracted with the passage of time. Suddenly, when it becomes "0", the process shifts to the CPU initialization process. That is, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, and enters the standby state, and under the situation where the power supply is being cut off, other processing is performed. While the standby state is maintained without execution and the upcoming power supply is cut off in a safe state, the CPU is initialized when the stable power supply is restored after a temporary power failure occurs. Move to processing and restart main processing. By executing such a standby process, it is possible to guarantee a stable gaming operation of the main control device 70 and thus the pachinko machine 1.

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. Since the main control device 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) after a power failure occurs, the stored contents of the RAM 76 are stored. It is retained without disappearing even after the power is turned off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when a power failure occurs after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous CPU initialization process (FIG. 15).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a process to be executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the command reception interrupt process. The payout control device 92 transmits a command for specifying a payout start indicating that the payout of the game ball has started to the main control device 70, and various devices related to payout of the prize ball as the game progresses (for example, the payout control device 92). The command transmitted from the payout device board 100, the full tank switch 161, etc.) to the main control device 70 is relayed. These commands transmitted by the payout control device 92 are received by the receive data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main control device 70. The main control CPU 72 executes the command reception interrupt processing (SCU interrupt processing) triggered by this command reception (SCU interrupt). Hereinafter, each procedure of the command reception interrupt processing will be described step by step.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and the F register (flag register) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of data reception interrupt processing.

Step S182: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks the specific bit of the status register to confirm whether or not there is data in the received data register (received FIFO). When it is confirmed that there is data in the received data register (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S184. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that there is data in the received data register (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S186.
Step S184: The main control CPU 72 stores the contents of the data register in the receive command buffer.

Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to each register, permits interrupting, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing to perform CPU initialization processing. Return to the main loop (FIG. 16).

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the timer interrupt process. The main control CPU 72 executes a timer interrupt process (PTC interrupt process) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of the timer interrupt processing will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the values of the AF register (accumulator / flag register pair) and BC, DE, HL register (general purpose register pair) used during the execution of the main loop into the save area of the RAM 76. Evacuate. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of timer interrupt processing.

Step S202: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits interruption. If the interrupt is permitted here, another interrupt can be generated while the next step or later of the timer interrupt process is being executed. As described above, multiple interrupts are permitted for the timer interrupt process. The interrupt controller 192 executes the reception of the interrupt request signal, the priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like. The interrupt management by the interrupt controller 192 will be described later.

Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes the dynamic port output process. In this process, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. More specifically, after clearing the output port, the main control CPU 72 stores the contents output to the common output request buffer corresponding to the selected common in the output port.

Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the port input process. In this process, in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 is a logical product of the input values of various switch signals from the parallel I / O port 79 and the inversion result value of the previous input value. Is stored in the input port on detection flag. As a result, it is possible to grasp the accurate input state based on the change from the previous time of various switch signals by the value (ON / OFF) of the input port on detection flag. Specific examples of the various switch signals include pass detection signals from the gate switch 78 and the probability change region switch 95, a middle start winning opening switch 80, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch. 85, a winning detection signal from the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the like are included.

Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes the timer update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments and updates counters such as various timers for external information and timers for security signals, in addition to the timer for managing the game time and the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory.

Step S210: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described in the process of the CPU initialization process (step S138 in FIG. 16).

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the hit symbol random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S214: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S206), the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85. , The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the winning detection signals from the first winning opening switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81, and further another process is executed according to the generated event. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using yet another flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 has an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes the process corresponding to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later using yet another flowchart.

Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). In this process, the process associated with changing or confirming the set value is executed. If the setting is not changed or confirmed, that is, the game is possible, the main control CPU 72 skips this step (without executing the setting change process) and instead calculates the base. Then, the process of displaying on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed. The main control CPU 72 is an out number indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area by the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening). The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the out switch).

Further, when the setting change process (setting-related process) is executed in this step, the main control CPU 72 generates a setting-related end designation command. Here, the "setting-related end specification command" is an effect command that informs that the processing related to the change or confirmation of the setting is completed, and the setting-related end specification command includes information on the setting value in addition to this. Can be included. The generated setting-related end designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16) executed in the main loop.

Step S216, Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S216), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or controls the execution of the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol. 2 The variable display or stop display by the special symbol display device 35 is determined, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later using yet another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the main control CPU 72 determines the variation display or the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol is varied and displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. Exciting to operate the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in a mode of deviation after the fluctuation display.

Step S220: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the state management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 is collected to an abnormal winning frequency (a state in which the number of balls entered into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally large) and a base abnormality (to the back side of the game board unit 8). The degree of risk such as the number of game balls, that is, the total number of winning balls in each winning opening 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, 31b is larger than the number of game balls driven into the game area 8a). Check if a high condition has occurred. When an abnormal state was detected, the main control CPU 72 generated an abnormality by outputting a security signal to the hall computer of the amusement park and by transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control device 124. Notify that.

Step S222: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port on detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S206) is ON, The prize ball control counter for each target is added by 1 and updated.

Step S224: The main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. Although the detailed flow is not shown, in this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether the payout command buffer is empty (whether the payout command to be transmitted is set), and is not empty (the payout command is not empty). If it is set), various payout commands output to the payout command buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92. For example, the payout command indicating the start mode when the power is turned on is set in the process of CPU initialization (step S118 and step S124 in FIG. 15) and output to the payout command buffer (step S126 in FIG. 15). However, a payout command indicating this activation mode is sent here. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to the process for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout control device 92 issues a prize ball designation payout command indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to. More specifically, a prize ball designation payout command corresponding to each prize ball control counter updated in the previous step S222 is transmitted here. For the transmission of the payout command, the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFA) is a predetermined number. When less than (more specifically, when the payout command set in the transmission FIFA in step S224 executed before the previous time has been transmitted, or when the transmission FIFA is currently being transmitted and there is space in the transmission FIFA. ) Only.

Further, particularly in step S224 at the time of turning on the power, when the payout command set in the process of CPU initialization processing is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch permission signal with this as an opportunity. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the emission permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port (specific output information setting means). As a result, the launch of the game ball is permitted after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, and the launch permission signal is sent to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, so that the game ball can be launched. It becomes a state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when the winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, the prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the port output process (step S236) described later.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the starting port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the starting port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are satisfied, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S226: The main control CPU 72 executes the firing position designation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the launch position designation flag to the previous launch position designation flag, and then clears the launch position designation flag. Then, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch position designation flag if the variable winning device is operating or the time reduction function is operating, and the launch position designation flag and the previous launch position designation flag match. If not, a launch position specification command is generated. The generated firing position designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16) executed in the main loop.

Step S227: The main control CPU 72 executes the security management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not an illegal prize has occurred and whether or not an excessive prize has occurred, based on the input state (ON / OFF) of various prize detection signals. Make a judgment. Further, the main control CPU 72 monitors fraudulent activity based on input signals from a magnetic detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, etc. (not shown). Then, when it is determined that such an error has occurred, the main control CPU 72 generates an error command. The main control CPU 72 can execute the corresponding processing corresponding to the error. Corresponding processing is, for example, processing of rewriting the bit of the winning detection signal due to illegal winning from ON to OFF, processing of generating a warning sound, processing of stopping the game, and the like. When the main control CPU 72 detects an error, the main control CPU 72 transmits an error command corresponding to each error to the effect control device. The error may include not only an error such as fraud but also the state of the gaming machine (state such as setting change).

Step S228: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an external information signal (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal board 160. Store in the request buffer.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a device or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time, and even if they are not won. Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S230: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 represents its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). Generate test signals and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S232: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. Performs processing necessary for managing the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, in a mode corresponding to the fluctuation display and stop display of the symbol determined in the above special symbol game processing (step S216) and the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the operation memory number display, the game state display, and the like. The drive signal for lighting each lamp is stored as byte data in the port output request buffer for each common.

Here, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is sequentially stored in the output port one common at a time in the dynamic port output process (step S204) each time the timer interrupt process occurs. It is output. For example, in the timer interrupt process executed next time, the byte data stored for common 1 is output to the port, and in the timer interrupt process executed one after another, the byte data stored for common 2 is output to the port. , And so on, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is processed one by one in order. As a result, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is sequentially driven in a common unit, and lighting control is performed by a dynamic lighting method. Will be.

Step S234: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 drives each drive signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region stored in the port output request buffer. , Test signals, etc. are stored together in the port output request buffer.

Step S236: The main control CPU 72 executes the port output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output request buffer), and if the value is stored, outputs the port. For example, the drive signals of the solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 stored in the port output request buffer in the previous step S234 are output to the port. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, and each solenoid can be made to operate according to the drive signal.

In this embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S216 to S236 are executed as a part of the timer interrupt process is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S238: The control CPU 72 returns the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, ends the timer interrupt processing, and enters the main loop of the CPU initialization processing (FIG. 16). Return.

[Interruption management by interrupt controller]
As described above, in the main control device 70, during the execution of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 15), which is the main control program, the parallel that is the source of the XINT interrupt (power cut-off save process (FIG. 17)). Interrupt request output by the I / O port 79), SCU interrupt (interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 that is the source of the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 18)), PTC interrupt (timer interrupt). An interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194, which is the source of the interrupt process (FIG. 19), may occur. These interrupt requests are managed / controlled by the interrupt controller 192 mounted on the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 permits the reception of the interrupt request by the interrupt permission command (EI command) of the main control CPU 72, and prohibits the reception of the interrupt request by the interrupt prohibition command (DI command), that is, the so-called masquerade interrupt. Is being controlled.

Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt are all generated based on independent factors that do not depend on each other, it is naturally conceivable that a plurality of interrupt requests occur at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to a predetermined priority order of the interrupt request in consideration of the importance of the interrupt process, the processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority of the interrupt request (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, the priority of the XINT interrupt (save processing when the power is turned off) is the lowest, and the SCU interrupt (command). The priority of reception interrupt processing) is set to the highest. By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization process (step S102 in FIG. 15), the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at subsequent timings. .. Actually, after the CPU initialization process transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 in FIG. 16), from the time when the interrupt is permitted (step S144 in FIG. 16) until the interrupt is prohibited (FIG. 16). When any interrupt request occurs during step S136) in 16, the interrupt controller 192 controls the accepted interrupt request based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when XINT interrupt and PTC interrupt are accepted at the same time, the higher priority PTC interrupt (timer interrupt process) is processed first. While the timer interrupt process is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in the interrupt wait state, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the power-off save process is executed.

Further, when the procedure example of each interrupt process is reconfirmed, in the power cut-off save process (FIG. 17) and the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 18), immediately before returning from each interrupt process (RETI instruction). The interrupt is permitted for the first time (immediately before the execution of FIG. 17) (step S152 in FIG. 17 and step S188 in FIG. 18), whereas in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), the interrupt is interrupted at the beginning of the interrupt process. Interrupts are allowed (step S202 in FIG. 19), after which the main steps are performed. That is, the interrupt controller 192 (main control CPU 72) prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the power off save process and the command reception interrupt process, while the interrupt controller 192 prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Allows execution of interrupts.

By controlling the interrupt request based on the priority in this way, the interrupt controller 192 enables execution of multiple interrupts in the main controller 70.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S214 in FIG. 19). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol storage update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current normal symbol operating storage number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol. do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation storage number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the probability change area switch 95 corresponding to the probability change area provided inside the second variable winning device 31. When the input of this detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute the process when passing through the probability variation region. As the process when passing through the probability change area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). , Advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). This probability fluctuation function activation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game. Further, as a process at the time of passing through the probabilistic region, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for passing through the probabilistic region. The probabilistic region passage command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16) executed in the main loop. The main control CPU 72 may execute the probabilistic region passage processing only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the probabilistic region solenoid 99 is operated during the jackpot game). On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol storage update process (step S12 in FIG. 20). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (set number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the jackpot determined random number and the jackpot symbol are in each section. Random numbers can be stored as a set (set) one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 20). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation storage number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value thereof. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 19).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (first lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random number values relating to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random numbers is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. This determination is made in the present embodiment because the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: In the case other than during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for making a judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the working memory number this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the working memory number "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it increases by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", respectively, and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory number increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 20).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 20). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 20). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation storage number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 21), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 19) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (second lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 21) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 21) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition). means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 21) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. To memorize as a set (memory means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 21) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the big hit (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judgment. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the increased operating memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special symbol destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 20).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 21 and step S46 in FIG. 22). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process relating to the first special symbol or the process relating to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the random number value for the first determination. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 21) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 22). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of operation of the "time reduction function". For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-shortening variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not activated (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, as in the above-mentioned processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 21) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 22). On the other hand, in the determination of step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the prior determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the prior determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not started yet. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this is "a symbol that can pass through the probability variation area (any of the probability variation symbols other than the 8-round normal symbol). ) ”, For example,“ A0H ”is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (look-ahead determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination random number stored so far has a winning value and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to the "non-probability (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (look-ahead determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state scheduled flag is stored in, for example, the flag area of the RAM 76. In addition, although an example of performing a strict advance hit determination using the "probability state scheduled flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not yet set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66 next.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 next sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low-probability comparison value is also predetermined according to the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag represents high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is predetermined according to the high-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the out-of-order variation pattern information pre-determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 21) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 22). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and from the result, the big hit type is "probability change area passable symbol (8 round normal symbol)" or "probability change area passable symbol (other than 8 round normal symbol)". Determining which of the probabilistic symbols) ”is applicable. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the prior determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a “probability variation region passage difficulty symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "probability change region passable symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol which is difficult to pass through a probabilistic region", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to a "symbol which can pass through a probabilistic region". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the prior determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the prior hit determination is performed only by the current probability state, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent prior determination based on the immediately preceding prior determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the probability state based on the previous previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the probability state based on the previous previous judgment result. If is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag represents a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if the loaded probability state schedule flag represents a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H). No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is for high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 or later is executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed after considering the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the prior determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 21) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 22).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol change pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol change processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device at the time of big hit. The configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) for the management process (step S5000) and the small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol change preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the change display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the big hit in the above-mentioned processing during the special symbol stop display. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player). During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the big hit variable winning device management process, until the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 counts the incoming balls for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 10 game balls). ), It is excited over a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 open and close in a predetermined pattern. During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to win a large number of prize balls at once (special game). Execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 times in total, these are referred to as "10 rounds". May be generically referred to.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed from the first round to the fifth round and from the seventh round to the tenth round, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in the sixth round. ing.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is terminated. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortening state) after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (probability fluctuation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high probability, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. The number of times of opening increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state" may be shifted to only one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted according to both of them.

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit in the previous process during the special symbol stop display. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), most of the winnings in the first big winning opening occur. do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) "6 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(2) "6 round probability variation jackpot 2"
(3) "8 rounds probability variation jackpot 1 (actually 4 rounds)"
(4) "8 rounds probability variation jackpot 2 (actually 8 rounds)"
(5) "8 rounds normal jackpot (actually 7 rounds)"
(6) "10 round probability change jackpot"
In this embodiment, big hits other than 6 rounds, 8 rounds, and 10 rounds may be provided.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "6 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, "8-round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "8-round probability variation symbol 1", and "8-round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "8-round probability variation symbol 2". Further, the "8-round normal jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "8-round normal symbol", and the "10-round probability variation jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "10-round probability variation symbol". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the large winning opening and the probability change area corresponding to each winning symbol will be explained.

[6 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Therefore, in the big hit game of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of falling under the "sixth round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of falling under "6 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the end of the big hit game, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state" is given to the player.

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", the jackpot game ends regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[6 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Therefore, in the big hit game of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round when the "sixth round probability variation symbol 2" is applied, the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, so that the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of falling under "6th round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the end of the big hit game, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state" is given to the player.

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the jackpot game ends regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state". The difference between "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is the difference in the number of time reductions given.

[8 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round and the second round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the first and second rounds in the case of falling under the "8th round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial ball (prize ball). Further, in the third to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Further, in the 7th and 8th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 7th and 8th rounds in the case of falling under the "8th round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial ball (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "8 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 4 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of falling under "8th round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of falling under "8 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the end of the big hit game, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state" is given to the player.

Furthermore, in the case of "8 round probability variation symbol 1", the jackpot game ends regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[8 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Further, in the 7th and 8th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the big hit game of "8 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 8 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of falling under the "8th round probability variation symbol 2", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of falling under "8 round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the end of the big hit game, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state" is given to the player.

Furthermore, in the case of "8 round probability variation symbol 2", the jackpot game ends regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[8 round normal design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "8 round normal symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, the sixth round in the case of falling under the "8th round normal symbol" is completed without giving the player a substantial number of balls (prize balls). Further, in the 7th and 8th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the big hit game of "8 rounds normal symbol", the player is substantially given 7 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of the "8th round normal symbol", it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the probable change area because the second big winning opening is short-opened. Therefore, the "probability fluctuation function" is not activated after the end of the big hit game, and the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state" is not given to the player.

In addition, in the case of "8 round normal symbol", even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the "time reduction function" is activated after the big hit game is completed. , The player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[10 round probability variation pattern]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "10 round probability variation symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Further, in the 7th to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Therefore, in the big hit game of the "10-round probability variation symbol", the player is substantially given 10 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round when the "10-round probability variation symbol" is applied, the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, so that the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of falling under the "10-round probability variation symbol", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the end of the big hit game, " The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of the "10 round probability variation symbol", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, after the jackpot game is completed. By activating the "time reduction function", the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

Here, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse. It will be closed.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to "any of the probabilistic symbols other than the 8-round normal symbol" and the game ball passes through the probabilistic variation area during the jackpot game, the internal state is "high probability" after the jackpot game ends. The privilege to shift to the "time reduction state" is given to the player. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the "8-round normal symbol", it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, so the internal state shifts to the "low probability time shortened state" after the jackpot game ends. do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to "any of the probabilistic symbols other than the 8-round normal symbol", if the game ball does not pass through the probabilistic variation area during the jackpot game, the internal state is "low probability time" after the jackpot game ends. Move to "shortened state".

Further, in the operation pattern shown in this table, the interval time between rounds is a common "1.5 seconds". The interval time between rounds is a waiting time set between rounds.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, the small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, in the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 operates) in the low probability state or the high probability state. The game to be played) is executed. In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but the winning to the first large winning opening is hardly generated. In addition, even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" is reached. No transfer benefits will be granted (it is not a prerequisite for this). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the small hit game ends, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small hit The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification is such that a small hit is set, but the game specification may be such that a small hit is not set.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for demo effect. The demo effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may be a program in which random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they are stored, without setting priorities for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 19), the display mode of the stored number by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time differs between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded by about 10 times compared to the low probability state. To. Further, the range of the jackpot value differs depending on the current set value, and the range of the jackpot value is set wider in the case of the high setting than in the case of the low setting. In this way, the special symbol lottery (predetermined lottery) is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the current set value. Then, if the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). ). The "small hit" here is something other than a non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated). In any case, if the read random value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be made while comparing with the random number value.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) based on the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be left, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and whether the current state is in the "time reduction state". Check if it is not. In the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is basically set to the shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except when the reach fluctuation is performed (reduced fluctuation time determining means). ). Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach is varied. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → 5). About seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display is 3 → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of deviation) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of deviation in the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, when a non-winning result is obtained as a result of the internal lottery, control is performed such that, for example, a "reach effect" is generated and the result is lost, or a "reach effect" is not generated and the player is lost. It is supposed to be. Then, in the "disappearance variation pattern selection table", variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance, and if non-winning is applicable, the variation pattern is defined. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, a super reach production, and a story reach production.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of loss]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, the "comparison value" and the "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "3" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "8" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "6" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of order after the normal reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "7" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of order after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern number “8” corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment after story reach. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation, the internal state (low probability state or high probability state, non-time reduction state or time reduction state), and the winning symbol (hereinafter,). Similarly).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of operating memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" corresponds to. It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice that.

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value in order with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101", so that the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value " 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 26: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of a big hit (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, six types of winning symbols are roughly prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the 6 types is "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 2", "8 round probability variation symbol 1", "8 round probability variation symbol 2", "8 round normal symbol", "10 round probability variation symbol". ". In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 1a", "6 round probability variation symbol 1b", "6 round probability variation symbol 1c" and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "40", "10", "50" has the denominator as 100. Corresponds to the proportion of cases. In the second column from the left, "8 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)", "8 round probability variation symbol 2 (substantially 8 rounds)", and "8 round normal symbol" corresponding to each distribution value (substantially 8 rounds). Substantially 7 rounds) ”is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "8 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)" is 40/100 (= 40%), and "8 round probability variation symbol 2 (substantially 4 rounds)". The ratio of selecting "8 rounds" is 10/100 (= 10%), and the ratio of selecting "8 rounds normal symbol (substantially 7 rounds)" is 50/100 (= 50%). .. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the big hit symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Select the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "8 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
The value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the second column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "8-round probability variation symbol 1" or "8-round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 170 times.
On the other hand, in the case of the "8-round normal symbol", since it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given. In addition, although it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbol 1" or "8 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[Number of time reductions]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "8-round probability variation symbol 1" or "8-round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 170 times.
On the other hand, in the case of "8 round normal symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times.
If the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, although it corresponds to the "8-round probability variation symbol 1" or the "8-round probability variation symbol 2", the number of time reductions is 100 times.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "60", "20", "20" has a denominator of 100. Corresponds to the ratio in the case of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "10 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation symbol 2" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "10 round probability variation symbol" is 60/100 (= 60%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 1". Is 20/100 (= 20%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is 20/100 (= 20%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is specified as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "10 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
The value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the second column from the right of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of probability variation is 170 times. Granted. In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation count is not given. ..

[Number of time reductions]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is given 170 times.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, which corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the number of time reductions is 100 times.
In addition, although it corresponds to "10 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Granted.

[See Fig. 26: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is hit as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the big hit. Then, in the "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined, and if a jackpot is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected. It will be.
Here, the reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, and a super reach production. Further, at the time of winning in the state where the time reduction function is activated, even if the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (the fluctuation pattern without the reach effect) is selected without selecting the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used at the time of a big hit (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, the "comparison value" and the "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "61" to "68" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "64" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the story reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "65" and "66" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern numbers "67" and "68" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the normal reach. In addition, at the time of winning in the state of high probability time shortening, the fluctuation pattern which becomes a hit may be set without executing the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101", so that the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value " 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 26: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) as the game state flag regardless of the winning symbol type (big hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410. ) Is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operating means, advantageous gaming state transition means, special state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with a stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of a small hit (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of the small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning symbol at the time of small hit, "one-time open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, another type such as "2 times open small hit symbol" or "3 times open small hit symbol" may be prepared. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger a change in the subsequent state to a "high probability state" or a "time reduction state", so the "2 rounds (2)" that are essential for this type of pachinko machine It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit symbol" without being bound by the provisions of "more than once opening).

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of off-normal fluctuation can be selected.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 24: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then sets the value of the timer counter according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) to the next jump destination, and generates a confirmation command. Here, the "confirmation command" is a command indicating that the special symbol has stopped. The confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 16) executed in the main loop.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 26). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 clears the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 26), the main control CPU 72. Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest existing working memory corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, if the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory in the storage area does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 is next. The process proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol whose storage area is to be shifted. .. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working storage counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command having a length of one word, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the decrease with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ") Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical sum) with an added value (for example," 10H ") meaning" decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption ". Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit becomes "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation storage number reduction effect command set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (storage number notification means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 26).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 24) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to the "big hit variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated and the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big role (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbol", the value corresponding to "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "8 round normal symbol", a value representing "8 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a value representing "6 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 26). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "10 round probability variation symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "10 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "8 round normal symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "8 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "6 rounds". The generated continuous operation count command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and the value is simply off (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cut counter. In the "count cut counter", the respective counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state". In this embodiment, since the so-called number-cutting probability change function is adopted, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state", the number-cutting counter for the high-probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times). The number-of-count counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times or 100 times). Further, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times).

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the number-of-count counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630 after generating the number-cut counter value command.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the number-of-count counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not 0. As a result of the subtraction, if the value of the number-of-times cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the value of the number-of-times cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to "any of the probability variation symbols other than the 6-round probability variation symbol 2", the number-of-count counter for the high probability state and the time reduction state is a predetermined numerical value. Since it is set to (for example, 170 times), it is the probability fluctuation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag that are reset.

Further, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2, the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set. Is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times). Therefore, it is the time shortening function activation flag that is reset when the 100th variation ends, and the probability variation function activation flag that is reset when the 170th variation ends (advantageous gaming state transition means). , Special state transition means).

Furthermore, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number of times cut counter related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so that only the time reduction function activation flag is reset. be. As a result, the time reduction state and the high probability state end after the stop display of the special symbol. After completing the above procedure, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 19) executed in the timer interrupt process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second as described above. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process to be done.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time saving state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the values of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the non-probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d is turned on. It can be switched (off) to the display. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the time reduction status display lamp 38e, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. .. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal not only to the time saving state display lamp 38e but also to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. .. In addition, when the launch position designation lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the big hit game, it lights from the start of the big hit game to the end of the "time reduction state", and does not light when the "time reduction state" ends. OFF).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing "10 rounds (10R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "8 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "8 rounds (8R)". Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "6 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "6 rounds (6R)".

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), the jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and the jackpot opening / closing operation process. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens / closes the jackpot opening / closing at the time of the jackpot. If the operation process is completed, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) at the time of a big hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the big hit big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process (as the next jump destination). Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening (opening number of each round and opening time), interval time between rounds, and count number in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol of this time. The number of winnings) and the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region are selected. The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability change region, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 25. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). It's not, but it's extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 26). Specifically, if "10 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 10. If "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "8 round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to eight. Further, if "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 6. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76 using the corresponding value in the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the opening time of the jackpot opening timer and the probabilistic region timer (counting the opening time of the probabilistic region) based on the large winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probabilistic change region set in the previous step S5204. Timer) is set. The value of the timer set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or the opening time of the probability variation region. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability change area timer, the opening time is the entry into the big winning opening or the probability change during one opening. It is a sufficient time for the passage of the region to easily occur (for example, a time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time is not impossible to enter the big winning opening or pass through the probability variation area during one opening. In both cases, it is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174) that hardly occurs (becomes difficult).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily sets the probability change area interval timer and the probability change area interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability change area solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Set a timer to count the waiting time for closing). The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the jackpot or the temporary closing time of the probabilistic region.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 34).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand prize opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first prize opening or the second prize opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. 25, the drive signal applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 35) is executed.

Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation area interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probabilistic region interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the probabilistic region opening process. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the probabilistic region solenoid 99 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the jackpot shown in FIG. 25. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the probability change area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation area timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 35) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the large winning opening opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5307a. To execute.

Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 performs step S5308. Execute.

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b: The probabilistic region closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so that the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps from step S5301 to step S5310. do.

If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time for the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. ..

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first prize opening or the second prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes the probabilistic region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the big winning opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 35).

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand winning opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 34) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the "number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern. In this embodiment, such an opening pattern is not adopted, and the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, in each round during the jackpot game, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), so that the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the steps from step S5301 to step S5320 are repeatedly executed. do. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. This big hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after the increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit.

Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 34). To execute. Then, after the execution of the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the big hit big winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 again executes the big hit big winning opening closing process, and steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. do. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (6 times, 8 times, or 10 times). Will be done.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of a big hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 34).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the jackpot flag. As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event processing (step S28 in FIG. 20).

Step S5508: When the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, 170 times). The set value of the number of probability fluctuations is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the number-cutting counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol variation (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since a practical upper limit is set in the high-probability state, the winning result may not be obtained in the high-probability state and the game may return to the low-probability state (so-called number-cut probability change). If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 26) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which time reduction number is set depends on the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag. That is, if the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 170 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function activation flag. If is not set, 100 times are set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). However, even if the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 100 times as the number of time reductions when the winning symbol corresponds to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2 (advantageous game). State transition means, special state transition means). The set time reduction count value is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the major winning combination, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability in progress" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction in progress". Generates a state specification command that represents. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 24) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). If the opening / closing operation process of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hit large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end process (step) as the next jump destination. Select S6500). Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the "small hit opening pattern", for example, an opening pattern of "0.1 second opening" is set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened to, for example, two, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit opening timer, and such an opening time hardly causes a prize to the large winning opening during one opening (difficult). It is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the launching device unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit time interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management processing (FIG. 39). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 40) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (the first major winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 39). Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure from step S6301 to step S6310. Run repeatedly.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set in a short time for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S6306.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 40).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 39). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S6314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S6301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 40). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 39).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 39). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process until the actual number of opening reaches the set number of opening (2 times). , The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 39). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the small hit end processing. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of a small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 39).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the value of the small hit flag, and erases "small hit in progress" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 24) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process.

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the "8-round normal symbol" or the "8-round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are applicable in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, [F1] the game is started from the normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is in the "low probability non-time shortened state". Therefore, by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to change and the game starts to change. It will proceed.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F2] "8 round normal symbol", [F3] 8 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F4] you are defeated in the battle of the big role production. , [F5] Shift to coastal mode.

[F5] The coastal mode is a low probability time shortening state. In the [F5] coastal mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F6] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the big hit of [F7] "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", [F3] 8 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] in the battle of the big role production. win.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the sixth round of the [F9] jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [F10] V prize has occurred is executed, and the [F11] fireworks rush is performed. Transition.

[F11] The fireworks rush is in a state of shortening the time with high probability. In the [F11] fireworks rush, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F12] special symbol fluctuates 170 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probabilistic area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (if V is not won), although it corresponds to [F13] "8 round probable variation symbols 1 and 2", [F10] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and the mode shifts to [F5] coast mode.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when "10 round probability variation symbols" or "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are applicable in the fireworks rush or the coastal mode.
If you win the jackpot of [G1] "10 round probability variation symbol" in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G2] 10 round jackpot game (special bonus) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the sixth round of the [G3] jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [G4] V prize has occurred is executed, and after the end of the jackpot game [ F11] Shift to fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probabilistic area in the 6th round of the big hit game (when the V prize is not won), the [G6] V prize is generated, although it corresponds to the [G5] "10 round probability variation symbol". An effect indicating that the game was not performed is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode.

If the jackpot of [G10] "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is won in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G11] 6 round jackpot game (normal bonus effect) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation area in the sixth round of the [G12] jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [G13] V prize has occurred is executed, and after the end of the jackpot game [ F11] Shift to fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if [G14] "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is applicable, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (V prize is not won), [G15] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and then the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode. Although not shown in particular, it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when 100 fluctuations have passed after shifting to the fireworks rush, it shifts to the normal mode, but internally it becomes a high probability non-time shortening state. ing.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the big hit is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the appealing power in appearance. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect using an effect symbol is performed.

The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each production pattern is, for example, a design of a picture card with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area on the screen.

FIG. 46 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed by using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol is used, but the second special symbol may be used). do. Further, the stop display effect is an effect of expressing the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 46 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large row of three effect symbols is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Memory display effect]
Further, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) indicating the working memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displayed numbers of the first special symbol operating storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating storage lamp 35a). Therefore, the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the change display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "6 round jackpot", "8 round jackpot", or "10 round jackpot" instead of "missing", the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color or red display color). Etc.), and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 46 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the variation display effect is started by scrolling the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect). Execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to display the variation. The production starts. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-variation display area X1 of the band-shaped portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the fluctuation, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the fluctuation. It moves to the changing display area X2 due to the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (stored image display maintenance effect). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Has been done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character dressed in a yukata sits on a chaise longue and relaxes as if it were a cool evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". In the present embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time saving function is not activated and the probability fluctuation function is also inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes corresponds to an internal "time reduction state" or a "high probability state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color thereof.

[Stop the design on the left]
In FIG. 46 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol first stops the fluctuation. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped at the position on the left side of the screen. The background image is not shown here (the same applies thereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 46 (B) above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the number of displayed markers M1 is increased accordingly. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one oldest (oldest) memory number display in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol in terms of production.

Then, in the example of FIG. 46 (C), the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, so that the remaining three displays in the pre-changing display area X1 are displayed. The effect is that the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (here, to the left) by one each. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" and "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed." Can be taught intuitively and in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Stop right production design]
In FIG. 46 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops changing. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear in appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "sliding pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" is stopped, thereby developing into reach. It is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding the symbol row in the opposite direction by one symbol, and the pattern that develops into reach is also possible. be. In addition, when a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again after the effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, the number "8" is expressed. There is also a pattern in which the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 46 (E): The last middle effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be. That is, in the illustrated example, it is shown that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen, and in this case, the combination of the effect symbols is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is an outlier, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the normal "outlier". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to display is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for winning, and finally to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery in the effect.

Further, although the above-mentioned example is for a non-winning case, at the time of a big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the big hit in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Is selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
Next, an example of the production at the time of a big hit (winning) will be described.
FIG. 47 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol. The super reach effect is a reach effect performed with a variation display in which a medium variation time (for example, 50 to 100 seconds) is selected.

Here, the flow of the super reach effect executed at the time of a big hit will be described, but the super reach effect is executed although the ratio is relatively low not only at the time of a big hit but also at the time of a miss. Further, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included here. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, for example, in the first special symbol display device 34, after the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, the first special symbol is the mode of the jackpot (for example, "self", "yo" of the 7-segment LED. , "Mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In FIG. 47, each effect symbol is shown simply by a number. Further, the markers M1 and M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the pre-change display area X1 and the changing display area X2 are not shown (the same applies to the following drawings). Hereinafter, the explanation will be given along with the flow of the production.

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 47 (A): For example, in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from above) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variable display effect is started by scrolling to the bottom).

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 47 (B): Next, in the relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a advance notice effect in which the mode changes gradually from the first stage to a plurality of stages (for example, the second to fifth stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is variablely displayed on the screen, and is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen, for example (other modes of appearance). It may be.). In addition, the "pre-reach notice" here means to give a notice of the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit before any of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 47 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage pre-reach advance notice effect, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image appears additionally from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 47 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice effect" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which a second-stage picture image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display of the production design is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 47 (D): The variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped in the middle of the variable display effect. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 47 (E): Then, following the left effect symbol, for example, the variable display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the right side of the screen, the reach state of "5"-"changing"-"5" has occurred. Then, an image that emphasizes one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the result of winning has not been displayed yet at this point). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, "5") is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at each of the four corners of the screen.

[Notice production after reach occurs (1st time)]
In FIG. 47 (F): After a while after the reach state occurs, for example, a post-reach advance notice effect (first time) is performed in which images representing heart figures form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. In this case, since the image of the heart group is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach notice, the effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 47 (G): Following the advance notice effect after the first reach occurs, for example, an image representing the numbers "2" to "6" is displayed on the screen in a three-dimensional row, and the row is displayed. From the beginning (front), the images of numbers are erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", and so on. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (implying) or reminding the player that the number "5" is a "big hit" if it remains unerased until the end. Further, when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means "big hit", and when the number "5" is also erased, it means "missing". In the case of off, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in the order of the numbers "2", "3", and "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation also increases. Then, if the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big hit" increases, so the player feels nervous. Also rises at once.

[Notice production after reach occurs (second time)]
In FIG. 47 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it were split into a large copy, and the character utters some dialogue (or silently). After the reach occurs, a notice production (second time) will be performed. At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is that "if the number" 5 "remains unerased, the possibility of a big hit of" 5 "-" 5 "-" 5 "increases". Therefore, by making a large image of the character appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that "it may be a big hit".

As a reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that "the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased, and if the number" 5 "is left unerased at the end, it becomes a big hit". When the image of the character appears at such a timing, the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that "the big hit may finally be near" can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 47 (I): Then, the final middle effect symbol stops. In this example, by displaying the effect symbol representing "5" in the center of the screen, it is possible to convey to the player that it is a big hit.

In FIG. 47 (J): Then, for example, the stop display effect as the effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been confirmed in the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is possible to keep the player from not disclosing to the player which winning symbol was won.

If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol, which is the subject of this change, is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol, so that the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. In this case, by displaying numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is performed to inform that the change did not result in a big hit. It should be noted that such an effect is executed as an "out-of-reach effect".

[Example of production during a major role when it corresponds to "8 round normal design" etc.]
FIGS. 48 to 51 are continuous diagrams partially showing an example of a large-scale production in the case of corresponding to "8-round normal symbol" or "8-round probable variation symbol 1 and 2".

In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "8 round normal symbol", the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the big role production, and it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2". In that case, the effect that the ally character defeats the enemy character is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of the production will be explained step by step.

[1st round]
In FIG. 48 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect during the big role is started. In the illustrated example, the image of the ghost of the umbrella that is the enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, the image of the female character that is the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the image of the characters "VS" is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. This makes it possible to teach the player that the battle effect is about to start.

Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (here, the effect symbol of "5") is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won in 5 production symbols”.

[2nd round]
In FIG. 48 (B): When the second round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role specifically progresses. In the illustrated example, the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised by the ghost of the umbrella and runs away, and disappears to the right side of the screen.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 48 (C): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role specifically progresses. In the illustrated example, a female character takes out a fan (weapon), and a flame (aura) appears from the fan (weapon).

[4th round]
In FIG. 48 (D): Then, in the fourth round of the jackpot game, a ghost of an umbrella performs a special move that causes a long tongue to pop out from the mouth, and a female character greets the special move with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with "8 round normal symbol", and if the female character wins, it means that it was a big hit with "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2". Means.

[5th round (when the 8th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 49 (E): In the case of winning in the "8th round normal symbol", the defeat effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, along with the characters "Defeat ...", the ghost of the umbrella is displayed in a large size, and the female character is displayed in a small size (allied character defeat production).

[6th round (when the 8th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 49 (F): In the case of winning in the "8th round normal symbol", the re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the 6th round. Specifically, a production is performed in which a female character utters a line such as "I will not lose next time!". This makes it possible to motivate the player to aim for a big hit again. In the subsequent round game, the same re-challenge promotion effect as in the sixth round is executed.

In the sixth round when the player wins the "8th round normal symbol", the second variable winning device 31 opens, but since the opening time is set extremely short, the game ball passes through the probability variation region. It is difficult.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 49 (G): At the timing when the big hit game in the “8-round normal symbol” ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coastal mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[5th round (8th round probability variation symbol 1, 2 when winning)]
In FIG. 50 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (8th round probability variation symbol 1, 2 when winning)]
In FIG. 50 (I): In the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the fireworks rush challenge production is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production is performed in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for the V attacker!". As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31. Further, in the sixth round when the "8th round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are won, the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 because the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. When the ball is struck, the game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region and passes through the probabilistic region.

In FIG. 50 (J): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probabilistic area, the panda character raises the V mark. Is executed. In the subsequent round game, the same blessing effect as in the sixth round is executed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 50 (K): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

The above is an example of the production when the game ball safely passes through the probability variation area corresponding to "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", but even if it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the game is played. If the sphere does not pass through the probabilistic region, the following production example will be obtained.

[5th round (8th round probability variation symbol 1, 2 when winning)]
In FIG. 51 (L): In the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (8th round probability variation symbol 1, 2 when winning)]
In FIG. 51 (M): In the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the fireworks rush challenge production is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production is performed in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for the V attacker!". As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31. Further, in the sixth round when the "8-round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31. Then, the game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability change region and passes through the probability change region.

However, here, it is assumed that no game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 by the end of the sixth round for some reason (not hitting right, jamming the ball, etc.). In this case, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 51 (N): In this case, a failure effect in which the panda character utters the line "sorry" is executed. In the subsequent round game, the failure effect will continue.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 51 (O): At the timing (during the end process) when the big hit game in the “8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2” ends, the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coastal mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

In addition, when it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbol 1", the profit obtained is smaller than that when it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbol 2", so that an effect other than the battle effect may be executed.

[Example of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 52 is a continuous diagram showing an example of producing a fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode in which the player wins the "8-round probability variation symbol other than the normal symbol" and is transferred after the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the jackpot game. Fireworks rush is a high probability time reduction state. Hereinafter, the flow of the production will be explained step by step.

In FIG. 52 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "fireworks rush". The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 52 (B): Then, due to the end of the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game, all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7". "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 52 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the fluctuation display for the second time is performed after the end of the big hit game. In the fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is operated frequently, so as long as the player continues to hit right, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Variable display is often performed. In addition, if the winning result is obtained in the fireworks rush, the reach effect is executed and it becomes a big hit.

In the fireworks rush, the marker M1 and the marker M2 may be displayed by displaying the pre-change display area X1 and the changing display area X2 as in the normal mode. This point is the same in the following coastal modes.

[Major role production (normal bonus production)]
FIG. 53 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big winning effect performed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to the “6 round probability variation symbol 1” or the “6 round probability variation symbol 2”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 53 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit in progress" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (here, the effect symbol of 2) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining stitch”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won in 2 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "normal bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and images related to festivals such as fan fans and drums are displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 53 (B): In the case of winning in "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or "6th round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production in which a female character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31. Further, in the sixth round when the "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or the "6th round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that the second variable winning device 31 When the game ball enters the ball, the game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability change region and passes through the probability change region.

In FIG. 53 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is displayed on the upper right of the display screen. Blessing production is performed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 53 (D): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Major role production (special bonus production)]
FIG. 54 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big winning effect performed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to the “10 round probability variation symbol”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 54 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit in progress" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (here, 7 effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won in 7 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "special bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a female character straddling a horse and performing a peace sign is displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 54 (B): In the case of winning in the "10 round probability variation symbol", the fireworks rush challenge production is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production is performed in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for the V attacker!". As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability such as aiming at the second variable winning device 31. Further, in the sixth round when the "10 round probability variation symbol" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game is played. The sphere is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 54 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark appears next to the female character that jumps up. The displayed blessing effect is performed.

[10 rounds]
In FIG. 54 (D): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and the final 10 rounds are entered, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 10" is displayed on the screen and the big hit game is in progress. An effect image peculiar to is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol (7 effect symbols) as the "remaining eye" is continuously displayed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 54 (E): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of coastal mode production]
FIG. 55 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the production of the coastal mode. This coastal mode is a jackpot game when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area after the end of the jackpot game when it corresponds to the "8 round normal symbol" or when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game which corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols. This is the mode to be transferred after the end of. The coastal mode is a "low probability time reduction state". Hereinafter, the flow of the production will be explained step by step.

In FIG. 55 (A): For example, after the jackpot game in the "8 round normal symbol" is completed, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the "coast mode" state. There is. The background image of the coastal mode is a background image with images such as "sandy beach", "sea", and "mountain" as motifs in order to express the healing impression which is the concept of the coastal mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 55 (B): Then, due to the end of this change (at the time of non-winning), all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 55 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coastal mode ends when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times without a winning result. When the coastal mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode with a low probability of non-time reduction. If the winning result is obtained in the coastal mode, the reach effect is executed and it becomes a big hit.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, notice effect, memory display effect, large role effect, and the like are all controlled through the following control processes executed by the effect control device 124.

[Production control processing]
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor and a function as an effect reproduction processor, and realizes these two functions by allocating different resources of the effect control CPU 126 to each. .. The effect control CPU 126 as the effect control processor receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and sets various control tables for instructing the reproduction of the effect according to the contents. Further, the effect control CPU 126 as the effect reproduction processor analyzes the control table set by the effect control processor and gives more specific instructions to each device based on the contents of the control table to operate each device (liquid crystal display). The pachinko machine 1 controls screen display by the device 42, audio output by the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58, light emission by various lamps 46 to 52, light emission by the board lamp 53, etc., displacement of various movable bodies by the movable body motor 57, etc.). Realize the production reproduction in.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, the operation subject when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor is expressed as the “effect control unit 210”, and the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect display processor. The operating subject of the case is appropriately expressed as "display control unit 220", "voice control unit 222", "ramp control unit 224", or "motor control unit 226" according to the content.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), error effect management process (step S400a), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), and input. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for control processing (step S405), lamp drive processing (step S406), acoustic drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received effect commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The effect commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start opening winning sound. Control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, confirmation command, status specification command, round count command, various error commands, jackpot end production command, count cut counter value command , Fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, probability change area passage command, prize ball content command, setting-related end specification command, etc.

Step S400a: In the error effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing the error effect based on various error commands (error effect execution means).

Step S401: In the working memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the memory display effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and during the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the content of the production (effect execution means). Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern for various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S404: In the display output process, first, the effect control unit 210 tells the display control unit 220 the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice. A message or control table for instructing the effect pattern number, the variable effect pattern number, the variable time notice effect number, the background pattern number, the pending deletion, etc.) is set. In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific drawing instruction to the VDP 152 based on the set message and the contents of the control table, and controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S405: In the input control process, first, the effect control unit 210 synchronizes with the scene in which the player requests an operation as the effect progresses, and the player controls the input control unit 228 to operate the operation unit 60 or the like. Instructs detection of whether or not the operation is performed in the specified mode. More specifically, the effect control unit 210 sets any of the input control tables defined in advance in the control ROM 180. In response to this, the input control unit 228 analyzes the contents of the set input control table, and based on this, sets a period during which the operation can be accepted for any of the operating members. Further, the effect control unit 210 detects whether or not an operation (operation requested from the player) that matches the designated mode is performed, outputs the detection result, and returns it to the effect control unit 210.

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, first, the effect control unit 210 sets a control table instructing the lamp control unit 224 to indicate the effect content. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the contents of the set control table and outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like. A light source or the like built in each part of the operation unit 60 is driven (on / off, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.).

Step S408: In the acoustic drive process, first, the effect control unit 210 sets a control table for instructing the voice control unit 222 of the effect content. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives an instruction of specific output contents to the voice IC 134 based on the contents of the set control table, and sounds (sounds) according to the effect contents from the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 ( Sound effects, BGM, etc.) are output.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control unit 210 first sets a control table for instructing the motor control unit 226 to indicate the effect content. In response to this, the motor control unit 226 gives an instruction of specific control contents to the SMC 199 based on the contents of the set control table. Further, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of the movable body 40f based on an instruction from the motor control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control unit 210 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process.
The operation memory effect management process is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in conjunction with the increase / decrease in the number of lottery elements (operation memory number) stored in the main control device 70, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. It is a process of updating the display of the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the above (memory display effect executing means), and is called and executed in the process of the effect control process (step S401 in FIG. 56). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command for increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command for reducing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved. When it is confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 changes the effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-variation display area X1. Select the effect to move to the middle display area X2. The storage marker moved to the variable display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the variable.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 56).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the effect symbol change process is completed. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the next jump destination. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) includes a case where the large hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 24) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or a small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 24). When step S6000) in the middle is selected, it is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol change preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the effect display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Select a pre-reach notice pattern, post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing processing, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 while executing a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and responds to the result. The control information of the effect content (operation trigger effect, continuous hit effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control unit 210 instructs the display control unit 220 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the display control unit 220 ends the variable display effect that was actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 via the VDP 152, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effective manner (design effect execution). means). At the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in the same or similar manner as the loss.

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the major role effect according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, when the "10-round probability variation symbol" is won, the effect control unit 210 selects a 10-round major role effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs the display control unit 220 of this. do. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the big role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process as it is, and in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 56) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 56), the content of the demo effect is displayed based on the demo effect pattern. Control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the out-of-order normal variation or the out-of-reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the change this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not this change is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the fluctuation pattern command of this time corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot fluctuation. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can be done. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and changes the effect schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (variation time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing). Determine the mode of stop display. It should be noted that all the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to "combination of symbols at the time of small hit".

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of loss are classified into "out-of-time normal variation", "time-shortening out-of-time variation", "out-of-reach variation", and the like, and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "out-of-reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of off is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time, presence / absence of reach occurrence, reach occurrence). In that case, the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined.

When any of the processes of step S608, step S610, and step S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). The notice effect is to give a notice to the player that a reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to give a notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set relatively high in order to raise the expectation of the player at the time of winning.

Step S616: The effect control unit 210 executes the mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is the "normal mode (low probability non-time reduction state)", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image in which a female character is sitting on a chaise longue. Further, when the stay mode is the "fireworks mode (high probability time shortened state)", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image with a fireworks motif. Further, when the stay mode is the "coastal mode (low probability time shortened state)", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a background image with the coast as a motif. When the stay mode is the "high probability non-time reduction state", the effect control unit 210 may select a background image corresponding to the normal mode, or may select a background image different from the normal mode. good.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 58), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various types are executed. The advance notice effect is executed based on the advance notice effect pattern.

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is operated. The variable winning device operation time processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operating processing (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). It is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the processing at the time of operating the variable winning device will be described along with each processing.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S904 to step S908) from the "jump table". For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operation process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device pre-operation processing has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. If the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Further, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the post-processing after operating the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning in the "8 round normal symbol", the process of selecting the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. In addition, in the case of winning in "8 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Further, in the case of winning in "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the process of selecting the normal bonus effect is executed. Furthermore, in the case of winning in the "10 round probability variation symbol", the process of selecting the special bonus effect is executed.

Step S906: In the process during operation of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 during the execution of the big hit effect, the input control unit 228 detects whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and the effect content (operation trigger effect) according to the result is detected. , Continuous hitting effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220. Further, in the process during operation of the variable winning device, when a probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (effect shown in FIG. 50 (J) or the like) is selected. While executing the process, if the probability variation area passage command is not received during the big hit game, the process of selecting the effect indicating that the V prize has not occurred (the effect shown in FIG. 51 (N) or the like). To execute.

Step S908: In the post-operation processing of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 executes an effect of transmitting the mode of the transition destination to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control unit 210 executes a coastal mode rush effect or a fireworks rush rush effect depending on whether or not a winning symbol or a probability change region has passed. Specifically, when a probability change area passage command is received during the jackpot game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is entered (effect shown in FIG. 50 (K) or the like) is executed, and the jackpot is executed. If the probability variation area passage command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the player enters the coastal mode (effect shown in FIG. 49 (G) or the like) is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 58).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the ground pattern 800 is arranged at least a part around a specific signal line (a signal line 700 for transmitting a high-speed signal or a signal line 710 for transmitting an important signal). Therefore, not only can it make it difficult for a specific signal line to be affected by noise generated by another signal line, but it can also make it difficult for a specific signal line to be affected by noise generated by another signal line, and as a result. , It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to be affected by or is not easily affected by electromagnetic influences such as noise in the elements constituting the circuit.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the width X of the ground pattern 800 is equal to or wider than the width Y of the specific signal line, so that the width X of the ground pattern 800 is the specific signal. Compared with the case where the width of the line is narrower than Y, the influence of noise can be further suppressed.

(3) According to the present embodiment, it is possible to protect signal lines and the like having high importance, so that the quality of the gaming machine can be improved.

(4) Noise countermeasures are indispensable for gaming machines used in amusement machines. By surrounding a specific signal line with a ground pattern, it is possible to protect the quality of the specific signal line of high importance and suppress the influence on other signal lines.

In the present embodiment, in the control board (board on which the output side IC and the reception side IC are arranged), a ground pattern (ground guard) is arranged so as to surround a specific signal line (signal line 700, signal line 710) (ground guard). Wiring).
A specific signal line is particularly important, and a clock signal that has a high frequency and is a noise source, a command data signal that is frequently updated, and noise, etc., have a large effect on the entire system (update frequency is low). It can be a signal line through which a reset signal or the like passes. The width of the ground pattern 800 is set to be about the same as (preferably or more) the width of a specific signal line or the size of the via hole 810. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the specific signal line to be affected by the noise generated by the specific signal line, or to make it difficult for the specific signal line to be affected by the noise generated by the other signal line.

(5) As a conventional technology, there may be a technology that uses the ground as a concept. However, unlike the present embodiment, there is no technique for surrounding the signal line with a ground pattern instead of the ground terminal. Further, unlike the present embodiment, there is no technique of enclosing a specific signal line related to importance and update frequency with a ground pattern. That is, the configuration of the present embodiment cannot be derived from the prior art in that it delves into which signal line the ground pattern is associated with.

(6) According to the present embodiment, since the damping resistor 920 is arranged in the wiring 700 to which the high-speed signal is transmitted, the electromagnetic influence on other wirings and other circuits can be suppressed as much as possible. , It is possible to prevent malfunction of the entire circuit of the gaming machine and ensure stable operation, and as a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to be affected by or received electromagnetic influence such as noise in the elements constituting the circuit. can.

(7) According to the present embodiment, the distance L1 from the output side IC 900 to the damping resistance 920 is shorter than the distance L2 from the receiving side IC 910 to the damping resistance 920 (L1 <L2), so that the effect of the damping resistance 920 is effective. It is possible to shorten the portion that is difficult to generate and lengthen the portion where the effect of the damping resistance 920 is likely to occur, and it is possible to efficiently suppress the influence of noise.

(8) In the board circuit design, it is known that high-speed signals such as clocks and image signals generally have a large overshoot and undershoot, and have a large effect as noise on peripheral circuits. Further, excessive overshoot and undershoot not only lead to damage to the receiving IC, but also may cause propagation delay due to reflection.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the impedance of the signal line 700 (transmission line) is adjusted to reduce overshoot and undershoot within a range that does not significantly delay the rise and fall of high-speed signals such as clocks and image signals. .. The impedance is adjusted by arranging a damping resistance 920 (adjustment component) on the signal line 700. The damping resistance 920 is in relation to the distance L1 from the output side IC 900 (or its terminal) that outputs a signal to the damping resistance 920 and the distance L2 from the receiving side IC 910 (or its terminal) that receives the signal to the damping resistance 920. , L1 <L2 so that it is arranged near the output side IC900 (or output terminal). The pattern width of the signal line 700 is preferably 0.3 mm or more, the length of the signal line 700 is preferably the shortest within the distributable range, and the signal line 700 is guarded by the ground pattern 800. Is preferable. As a result, the electromagnetic influence on other circuits on the board can be suppressed as much as possible, malfunction of the entire circuit in the board can be prevented, and stable operation can be ensured. In addition, it is possible to prevent damage to the IC and prevent delays in high-speed signals.

(9) As a conventional technique, there is no technique for suppressing radiation noise by a damping resistor (circuit element). That is, one of the features of this embodiment is "when adjusting the impedance of a high-speed signal transmission line (specific signal line), an IC (or its terminal) that outputs a signal and a component for adjustment (damping resistance). ), And the distance L2 between the IC (or its terminal) that receives the signal and the adjustment component, a damping resistor is placed near the IC on the output side so that L1 <L2. " This feature cannot be derived by those skilled in the art.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of production and various numerical values given in one embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the above-mentioned contents.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region. It is also possible to apply the present invention to a so-called simultaneous turning machine.

The present invention is applicable not only to pachinko machines but also to slot machines.
Although the circuit element has been described with the example of the damping resistor, it may be a noise filter or a ferrite bead.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and these can be appropriately modified.

FIG. 61 is a front view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. Further, FIG. 62 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. In the following description, basically, the same description as that of the above-described embodiment is omitted, but there are some parts that are duplicated. Further, with respect to the reference numerals in the drawings, there are parts having the same reference numerals as those in the above-described embodiment and parts having different reference numerals. The major difference between the above-described embodiment and the other embodiment is that a decorative unit having a different shape is attached to the front upper portion of the pachinko machine of the other embodiment. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine of another embodiment will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

Here, in the present specification, the left side is the left side when viewed from the player who is seated facing the pachinko machine 1, the right side is the right side when viewed from the player, and the upper side is the top side when viewed from the player. The explanation is that the lower side is the bottom when viewed from the person, the front side is the front side when viewed from the player, and the back side is the rear side when viewed from the player.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. With the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof makes it impossible to open the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the locking tool. ..

Further, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game hall inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (a game area on which the game ball flows down, a board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

[Composition of ball plate]
The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 toward the front surface as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower plate 6b or lower plate) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It will be paid out in 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) worth of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the example of the model connected to the card unit is described, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can, for example, push the upper plate ball removal button 6d to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can push the lower plate ball removing lever 6e backward to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration in the game area 8a will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower side of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper position of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49 each incorporate a speaker 54 on a glass frame, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each have a speaker 55 in a glass frame. Is built in. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled toward the front side by the player, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (notice effect, probable change promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

Further, around the push button 64, a ring-shaped portion 65 is installed so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. Further, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is expressed as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time was exhausted. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on / off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced version image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced version image. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit 65 in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is configured to have a structure that greatly protrudes upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it pops out to a height about three times higher than in the normal state. The push button 64 has a light source inside thereof. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but when protruding, it emits more colorfully and can exert a great presence. By such an operation of the push button 64, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60, but the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Decorative unit]
A decorative unit 800 is attached to the upper front part of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative unit 800 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined mounting member (mechanical mechanism such as a screw or a hook). The decorative unit 800 may be non-removable from the pachinko machine 1.
The decorative unit 800 (decorative object) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light. The decorative unit 800 is a cube-shaped member on which predetermined character information is displayed, and the LED (for example, the left top lens unit 47 or the glass frame top lamp 46) arranged in the rear integrated door unit 4 emits light. It emits light.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 62, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the power supply control unit 162, the main control board unit 170, the payout device unit 172, the flow path unit 173, the launch control board set 174, the payout control board unit 176, and the back cover Unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), external terminal boards 160, power cord (power plug) 164, which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, are used. A ground wire (earth terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed.

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a manner visible in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for a setting key. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing a RAM (RWM) installed in the main controller, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referring to the setting related to the game of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , A game ball replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game ball stored in the prize ball tank 172a is guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal board 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island facility of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 63 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 of another embodiment alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side portion of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area L) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right side portion of the game area 8a is the special game state (big hit game). It is a second gaming area (right-handed area R, specific area) used in a state, a small hit game state, a low probability time shortening state, a high probability time shortening state, etc.). The left side portion of the gaming area 8a is also used in the high probability non-time shortening state (advantageous gaming state). Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the right side (upper right) of the middle start winning opening 26, and the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the upper side of the second variable winning device 31. Further, the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and the one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged on the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. There is.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation in the process of its flow down. The ball enters the 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during open operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit a game ball into the area) (perform a so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ), It is necessary to hit the game ball (execute the so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and the right start is performed accordingly. It is possible to enter a ball into the winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue piece type (veloc type) opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position (retracted position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b catches the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It is possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device in which the opening / closing member is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge to open the right starting winning opening.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit or small hit). It operates when the condition that it is the 5th round or the 7th to 10th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generation means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged below the variable starting winning device 28 (upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to win the first prize opening 30b (the first prize opening 30b is closed). be. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and the event of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30b. The game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30b passes through the first count switch 84, and after the winning is detected, it is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the collection passage (without reference numeral).

The second variable winning device 31 is said to be a predetermined second condition (for example, the sixth round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode). It operates when the condition) is satisfied, and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged below the first variable winning device 30 (lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a, so that the opening / closing member 31a is moved to the second large winning opening 31b. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends to the lower left from the second large winning opening 31b, and branches into two at the end.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a blade member 31d for the probability change region and a hole 31e for the probability change region are arranged on the lower right side of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge region) is arranged on the lower left side of the 31c.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first entered by the second count switch 85. Here, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 31d is ON, the probabilistic region blade member 31d moves to a position (open position) retracted deeper than the board surface, and the game ball. Is led to the hole 31e for the probabilistic region. On the other hand, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 31d is turned off, the probabilistic region blade member 31d moves to a position (closed position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, so that the game is played. The sphere passes through the upper part of the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability change area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation region is an region in which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. If so, it is an area where the game ball can pass.

The probabilistic region blade member 31d may operate during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region is such that the probabilistic region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probabilistic region is opened for a long period of time. One of a long opening pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds) and a short opening pattern that opens a short opening for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round is applied. .. Which operation pattern is used to operate the probabilistic region blade member 31d can be selected by the winning symbol. Specifically, a long open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a long time is selected when the probabilistic symbol is won, and a short open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a short time is selected when the normal symbol is won.

As the operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 31d, only the pattern in which the probabilistic region blade member 31d is long-opened is applied, and when the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened and the round ends, the probabilistic region The opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time may be eliminated. Further, since the game ball does not reach the probability change region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult to guide the game ball to the probability change region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (high probability time reduction state). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (low probability time reduction state).

The effect unit 40 is installed in the game board unit 8 from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added. A ring-shaped logo LED unit 900 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration imitating the shape of a spade). The movable body 40f for effect can perform an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. .. A blade member that is constantly movable by a solenoid (not shown) is placed at the entrance of the ball guide passage 40d, and a distribution device that is constantly movable by a solenoid (not shown) is placed at the exit of the ball guide passage 40d (a game ball at the middle start winning opening 26). A device for sorting whether or not to induce a solenoid) may be arranged.

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game balls that have entered the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are also driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls that have been removed are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

[Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail]
FIG. 64 is a schematic view showing a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 61. FIG. 64 shows a cross section cut by a plane parallel to the vertical direction and the front-rear direction passing through the upper end (top, upper end of the outer peripheral surface 502 (outer rail)) of the game area 8a. The cross section shown in FIG. 64 also passes through the upper end (top) of the inner peripheral surface 504 (inner rail) and the upper end (top) of the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 (design member).

The rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located below the upper end of the game area 8a in the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a (the front part of the upper end of the game area 8a). That is, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located below the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500. Further, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located above the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500. Further, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located above the lower end of the game ball X (the game ball in contact with the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guidance passage 500) located at the upper end of the game area 8a. is doing. More specifically, it is located above the center of the game ball X in this state (the position shown by the alternate long and short dash line Y in FIG. 64).

Further, the protruding portion 856 projects downward from the center of the game ball X in a state of being located at the upper end of the game area 8a. That is, the lower end of the protrusion 856 is located below the center of the game ball X in that state. More specifically, the lower end of the protruding portion 856 is located below the lower end of the game ball X in the state. Further, the protruding portion 856 projects downward from the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500.

As is clear from the above, the decorative unit 800 overlaps with the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , It is designed to cover the entire game ball X in the state. Further, in the decorative unit 800, the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a at the rear end of the lower surface 852 (the front part of the upper end of the game area 8a) is in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). The game ball X is not overlapped with at least the lower half of the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a, and does not cover at least the lower half of the game ball in the state. Further, the rear portion of the lower surface 852 is an inclined surface 854. Therefore, even when the game ball is located at the upper end of the game area 8a, the player can easily see the game ball rolling in the game area 8a. Here, it is preferable that at least the lower half of the game ball in the state can be seen from a predetermined position, specifically, the player's eye point, without the player moving his / her face up / down / left / right. The player's eye point means the position of the player's eyes when sitting on a chair and playing a game. Specifically, for example, when the distance between the glass unit G and the player's eyes in the front-rear direction is less than 50 to 90 cm, at least a part of the game ball in the state without the player moving his / her face up / down / left / right. It is good to be able to see (lower half). That is, the decorative unit 800 is on a straight line from a predetermined point where the distance from the glass unit G is less than 50 to 90 cm to the game ball X (the portion below the center of the game ball X) located at the upper end of the game area 8a. It is good that it does not take.

The following features can be derived from the configuration of FIG. 64. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A front frame (integrated door unit 4) having a design part (top lens part, decorative unit 800) and an inner frame (inner frame assembly 7) having a game board (game board unit 8) are provided at the upper part. It is a gaming machine.
(2) A game area 8a is formed on the game board.
(3) At the upper part of the game area 8a, there is a guide passage 500 that guides the game ball to the right-handed area.
(4) The guide passage 500 has an outer peripheral surface (outer peripheral surface 502, upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) and an inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral surface 504, lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500).
(5) Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as the first reference line L1.
(6) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 can intersect the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1), the design The rearmost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as the first design portion D1.
(7) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 can intersect the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as a second design portion D2.
(8) The first design portion D1 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension A) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm). The diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm.
(9) The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm).
Since the second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the design portion can be enlarged. can.
Further, when the game ball is strongly launched (game ball passage) by making the distance between the first reference line L1 and the first design part D1 smaller than the diameter of the game ball while increasing the size of the design part in this way. When the game ball rolls along the upper surface of the above), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

(10) Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the part located directly below the top of the outer peripheral surface on the inner peripheral surface (the part on the right side of the point B, the part on the left side of the point B, and the part that becomes the point B). ) Is the second reference line L2.
(11) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 can intersect with the second reference line L2), the design The rearmost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as the first design portion D1.
(12) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 can intersect, the part where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersect with the design portion), the design. The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as a second design portion D2.
(13) The first design portion D1 is located above the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension C) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm).
(14) The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm).
Since the second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2 and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the design portion can be enlarged. can. Further, when the game ball is launched weakly by making the distance between the second reference line L2 and the first design part D1 equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball while increasing the size of the design part in this way (game ball passage). When the game ball rolls along the lower surface of the game ball), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the game board surface can be ensured by the structure.

[Arrangement of positioning holes on the outer rail]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an outer rail. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a game board, an outer rail, and a rail base. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing how the game ball comes into contact with the outer rail. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an outer rail and a game board.
As shown in FIG. 65, the outer rail 600 is a bendable thin plate-shaped horizontally long member. The outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 (holes) for guiding the attachment position to the game board (rail base 700). Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of holes 602 used for processing the outer rail 600. The hole 602 is smaller in size than the guide portion 601.

The distance Wc from the center of the predetermined guide portion 601 (hole) to the end (lower end in the figure) of the outer rail 600 is set to 2.7 mm. That is, the predetermined guide portion 601 is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit. More specifically, all the predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at positions where the game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit.

As shown in FIG. 66, the rail base 700 is arranged in front of the game plate 8b, and the curved outer rail 600 is arranged on the curved guide surface 702 inside the rail base 700. A plurality of protrusions 701 are formed on the guide surface 702 at positions corresponding to the predetermined guide portions 601.

As shown in FIG. 67, the outer rail 600 is arranged on the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700. A protrusion 701 of the rail base 700 is inserted into a predetermined guide portion 601 of the outer rail 600, whereby the outer rail 600 is positioned on the rail base 700. Here, the protrusion 701 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball X.

As shown in FIG. 68, the outer rail 600 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, passes from the start end (PS) of the outer rail 600 on the lower left, passes through the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 on the left side, and is on the upper side. It is curved so as to pass through the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 and reach the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 on the upper right.

The following features can be derived from the configurations shown in these figures. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 8, game board 8b, rail base 700) forming a game area, and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board.
(2) The outer rail 600 has a predetermined guide portion 601 for guiding the mounting position to the game board (holes (many) for inserting the protrusions 701, holes for mounting the positioning pins, and cutouts for fitting the protrusions 701). Are formed in plurality. Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a hole 602 used when processing the outer rail 600.
(3) In a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is set as the first range (H1), and the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is set. The range from the upper end (PU) to the upper end (PU) is defined as the second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the third range (H3).
(4) The number of predetermined guide portions 601 is larger in the first range (H1) (for example, 3) than in the second range (H2) (for example, 2), and is in the second range (H2). There are more than the third range (H3) (for example, 0).

As a result, a large number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the ball launcher side where the impact received from the game ball is large and the arrangement of the outer rail 600 is particularly required to be accurate, and the outer rail 600 on the ball launcher side is displaced. And vibration can be reliably prevented.
Further, the terminal side of the outer rail 600, which receives a small impact from the game ball and has little influence on the game, has a small number of predetermined guide portions 601 so that the outer rail 600 can be easily processed and attached to the rail base 700. can do.

(5) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the second range (H2) in the first range (H1) and the third in the second range (H2). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(6) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the third range (H3) in the first range (H1) and the third in the second range (H2). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(7) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the second range (H2) in the first range (H1) and the third in the first range (H1). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(8) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed at the upper apex (PU) and the left apex (PL) of the outer rail 600.

(9) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed in the third range (H3).
(10) The predetermined guide portion 601 is formed at a position where the game balls do not come into contact with each other (for example, a position avoiding a trajectory with which the game balls come into contact).
(11) The outer rail 600 is supported along the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700, and the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 is inclined so that the game ball does not easily flow in the forward direction.
(12) The predetermined guide portions 601 are not evenly arranged at each other.

(13) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is the fourth range (H4). ), And the range from the left end (PL) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the fifth range (H5), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the fourth range (H4) (for example, 3). The number of pieces) is larger than that of the fifth range (H5) (for example, two pieces).
(14) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is the sixth range (H6). ), And the range from the upper end (PU) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the seventh range (H7), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the sixth range (H6) (for example, five). ) Is more than the seventh range (H7) (for example, 0).
(15) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the middle (PM) of the outer rail 600 is the eighth range (H8). ), And the range from the middle (PM) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the ninth range (H9), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the eighth range (H8) (for example, 4). The number of pieces) is larger than that of the ninth range (H9) (for example, one piece).
Then, by adopting such a configuration, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized and the game can be performed according to the design value.

The invention may be a combination of the invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end portion of the outer rail] and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail], and has been described in the above embodiment. The invention may be a combination of an invention having a configuration, an invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end portion of the outer rail], and an invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail]. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the trajectory of the gaming ball and playing the game as designed. Further, by stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball, it is possible to reliably secure the visibility of the game ball from the lower surface side of the decorative unit.

[Dimensions of the finger hook of the handle]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the periphery of the handle having an operating angle of 0 degrees (minimum angle), and FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the periphery of the handle having an operating angle of 100 degrees (maximum angle).
The handle 950 (launch handle) is a circular member formed in a dome shape. The handle 950 is provided with three radially projecting finger hooks 952 (952a, 952b, 952c) around a centrally located circular member.
As shown in FIG. 69, when the handle 950 is not operated, the first finger hook portion 952a located on the left side of the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side surface of the thumb of the player's right hand. Further, when the handle 950 is not operated, the second finger hook portion 952b located on the upper side of the handle 950 mainly comes into contact with the right side surface of the index finger of the player's right hand. Further, when the handle 950 is not operated, the third finger hook portion 952c located on the diagonally upper right side of the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side surface of the middle finger of the player's right hand.
The handle 950 (operating means) is rotatable from the initial position (position shown in FIG. 69) to the maximum rotation position (position shown in FIG. 70) (rotatable within the range from the initial position to the maximum position). The handle 950 is a member operated by the player to launch a game ball into the game area, and is a member of the right-handed area from the initial position via a left-handed reference position corresponding to a predetermined position of the left-handed area. It can rotate to the right-handed reference position corresponding to the predetermined position. When the handle 950 is rotated to the left-handed reference position (predetermined reference position), the game ball (game medium) is fired at the left-handed area (first game area), and the handle 950 is right-handed reference position (maximum). When rotated to the position), the game ball is fired at the right-handed area (second game area).

The distance D1 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the first finger hook portion 952a is, for example, 53.4 mm.
The distance D2 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the second finger hook portion 952b is, for example, 45.6 mm.
The distance D3 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the third finger hook portion 952c is, for example, 39.3 mm.
The distance E from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the handle 950 is, for example, 34.6 mm.
The distance F from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the integrated door unit 4 is, for example, 40.0 mm. The distance from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the inner frame assembly 7 is, for example, 45.0 mm.
The distance G from the center of the handle 950 to the right end of the integrated door unit 4 is, for example, 49.1 mm. The distance from the center of the handle 950 to the right end of the inner frame assembly 7 is, for example, 51.1 mm.
These numerical values are merely examples and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the game and the like.

The following features can be derived from the configurations shown in these figures. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A main body frame (front door and middle door) having a front frame (front door, integrated door unit 4) and an inner frame (middle door, inner frame assembly 7), and an outer frame (outer) to which the main body frame can be attached. It is a gaming machine equipped with a frame unit 2).
(2) The main body frame has a handle 950 (launch handle, handle unit 16).
(3) The handle 950 has a finger hook portion 952.
(4) The handle 950 can rotate from the initial position to the maximum rotation position.
(5) When the handle 950 is in the initial position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude below the lower edge of the main body frame (the lower edge of either the front frame or the inner frame).
(6) When the handle 950 is in the maximum rotation position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude below the lower edge of the main body frame.

As a result, even when the main body frame is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hook portion 952 does not come into contact with the floor or the like, and the handle 950 is not damaged. Therefore, the risk of damage to the parts can be reduced.

(7) Regardless of the rotation position of the handle 950, the finger hook portion 952 may not protrude below the lower edge of the main body frame.
(8) When the handle 950 is in the initial position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude to the right of the right edge of the main body frame (the right edge of either the front frame or the inner frame).
(9) When the handle 950 is in the maximum rotation position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude to the right of the right edge of the main body frame.
(10) Regardless of the rotation position of the handle 950, the finger hook portion 952 may not protrude to the right of the right edge of the main body frame.
(11) Assuming that the finger hook portion having the largest protrusion amount is the maximum finger hook portion (first finger hook portion 952a), the tip end portion (PT) of the maximum finger hook portion is the lowest point (PT) of the rotation trajectory at the maximum rotation position. It may not be located in PB).

[Torque of the handle]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 1).
As for the torque (operating torque) of the handle of the first embodiment, the torque required for the initial movement is 6.8 N · mm, and the torque required to rotate the handle to the left-handed reference position is 13.6 N · mm. The torque required to rotate the handle to the right-handed reference position is 23.8 N · mm. The handle displaced to the right-handed reference position returns to the origin by the reaction force of the spring.

Further, in the handle of the first embodiment, the displacement amount from the initial position (initial movement) to the left-handed reference position (hereinafter referred to as "displacement amount A") is 6.8, and the left-handed reference position is right-handed. The amount of displacement to the reference position (hereinafter referred to as "displacement amount B") is 10.2. Although not shown, the operating angle to the left-handed reference position is 49.0 degrees, and the operating angle to the right-handed reference position is 100.0 degrees. Regarding the amount of displacement, A <B (6.8 <10.2) and 2A> B (13.6> 10.2).

As described above, the handle of the first embodiment reduces the operation torque required for the initial movement, minimizes the displacement amount, and lays down the torque curve, so that it is hard to get tired even if the game is played for a long time.

As for the torque of the handle in the comparative example, the torque required for initial movement is 31 N ・ mm, the torque required to rotate the handle to the left-handed reference position is 69 N ・ mm, and the handle is rotated to the right-handed reference position. The torque required for this is 152 N · mm.

Further, in the handle of the comparative example, the displacement amount A is 38 and the displacement amount B is 83. That is, A <B (38 <83), but not 2A> B (76 <83).

As described above, the handle of the comparative example has a high initial torque and a rapid torque movement, so that it is very easy to get tired.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 2).
As for the torque of the handle of the second embodiment, the torque required for the initial movement is 27.2 N · mm, the torque required to rotate the handle to the left-handed reference position is 54.4 N · mm, and the right-handed reference position. The torque required to rotate the handle is 95.2 N · mm.

Further, in the handle of the second embodiment, the displacement amount A is 27.2 and the displacement amount B is 40.8. That is, A <B (27.2 <40.8) and 2A> B (54.4> 40.8).

As described above, the handle of the second embodiment has a slightly larger operating torque required for the initial movement than the first embodiment, but is smaller than the comparative example, and the displacement amount is minimized and the torque curve is laid down for a long time. It is hard to get tired even if you play a game.

The torque of the handle of the comparative example is the same as that of FIG. 71.

The following features can be derived from the configurations shown in these figures. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) The operating torque required for rotation of the handle from the initial position (necessary for initial movement to start rotation of the handle from the initial position) is defined as the first operating torque (6.8 N · mm).
(2) The second operating torque required for rotation from the initial position of the handle to the left-handed reference position (bump position, predetermined reference position) (necessary for rotating the handle from the initial position to the left-handed reference position). The operating torque is (13.6 N · mm).
(3) The operating torque required for rotation from the initial position of the handle to the maximum rotation position (right-handed reference position, full stroke position, maximum position) (necessary to rotate the handle from the initial position to the maximum rotation position). The third operating torque (23.8 N · mm) is used.
(4) The second operating torque is larger than the first operating torque.
(5) The third operating torque is larger than the second operating torque.
(6) The third operation torque is less than twice the second operation torque.

In this way, since the difference between the second operating torque and the third operating torque is small, the operating torque does not increase sharply between the left-handed reference position and the maximum rotation position, and the player can use the second operating torque. I feel that the difference between the third operation torque and the third operation torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

(7) Further, the second operation torque is less than twice the first operation torque.
In this way, since the difference between the first operating torque and the second operating torque is small, the operating torque does not increase sharply between the initial position and the left-handed reference position, and the player can use the first operating torque. I feel that the difference between the second operation torque and the second operation torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

(8) The operation angle from the initial position of the steering wheel to the left-handed reference position is defined as the first operation angle (45 to 60 degrees).
(9) The operation angle from the initial position of the handle to the maximum rotation position is defined as the second operation angle (100 to 120 degrees).
(10) The first operating angle (for example, 45 degrees) is less than half of the second operating angle (for example, 100 degrees).

By adopting the configuration described in [Handle Torque], it is possible to provide a handle unit that minimizes the operation torque and its movement (displacement) that are not tiring even in a long-time right-handed game. The firing handle (handle operation unit) has a structure in which the origin is returned by a spring, but the player always operates in the opposite direction to this spring reaction force to play the game. By reducing the torque at the time of initial movement of this reaction force and minimizing the amount of movement (displacement amount), it is possible to provide a handle unit that does not get tired easily. Specifically, in the first and second embodiments described above, the initial torque is suppressed to the minimum force that can return to the origin, and the torque curve is laid down to realize a handle unit that does not get tired easily.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment can be combined with the gaming machine of another embodiment. Moreover, the comparative example does not constitute the prior art.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 16 Handle unit 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special Symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal display 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
130 RAM
210 Production control unit

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area having a first game area and a second game area is formed, and
An operating means that can rotate within the range from the initial position to the maximum position,
A board provided on the game board and on which a plurality of circuit elements including at least a control element and a wiring pattern including at least a signal line electrically connecting the circuit elements are mounted is provided.
The signal line is
It includes at least a first signal line through which the first signal passes and a second signal line through which the second signal passes, unlike the first signal line.
The second signal is
At least one of importance, frequency, or update frequency is different from the first signal.
The wiring pattern is
It has a ground pattern arranged at least in a part around the second signal line.
When the operating means is rotated to a predetermined reference position, the game medium is launched with respect to the first gaming area, and when the operating means is rotated to the maximum position, the gaming medium is directed to the second gaming area. The game medium is launched and
The operating torque required to start the rotation of the operating means from the initial position is defined as the first operating torque.
The operating torque required to rotate the operating means from the initial position to the predetermined reference position is defined as the second operating torque.
Assuming that the operating torque required to rotate the operating means from the initial position to the maximum position is the third operating torque.
The second operating torque is larger than the first operating torque.
The gaming machine characterized in that the third operating torque is larger than the second operating torque and is twice or less the second operating torque.

Images